Panasonic DMR-EH68, DMR-EH58 User Manual

Operating Instructions

DVD Recorder

Model No. DMR-EH68

DMR-EH58

The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show images of the black model of
DMR-EH58 for Australia and N.Z.

Instructions/notes regarding SD Cards and
SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EH68
model only.

Region number supported by
this unit

Region numbers are allocated to DVD
Recorders and DVD-Video according to
where they are sold.

For Asia

≥The region number of this unit is “3”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with

labels containing “3” or “ALL”.

Example:

2

3 ALL

For Australia and N.Z.

≥The region number of this unit is “4”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with

labels containing “4” or “ALL”.

Example:

4 ALL

3

5

2

3

4

Guide

Quick Start

Basic

operations

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

For Middle East

≥The region number of this unit is “2”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with

labels containing “2” or “ALL”.

Example:

2

2 ALL

3

5

Dear customer

Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum
performance and safety, please read these
instructions carefully.

Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.

GC GCS GN

RQT9075-L

CAUTION!

THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE,
≥DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,

DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE
PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.

≥USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
≥DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE

NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION!

≥DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,

BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY
OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
VENTILATION VENTS.

≥DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS

WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.

≥DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS

LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.

≥DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY

FRIENDLY MANNER.

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.

[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]

THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN TROPICAL CLIMATES.

This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.

The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily
operable.
To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains,
disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.

Caution for AC Mains Lead

(For Saudi Arabia)

For your safety, please read the following text carefully.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for
your safety and convenience.
A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the
replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and that it is approved
by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark Ï or the BSI mark Ì on the body of the
fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it
is refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a
replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local
dealer.

CAUTION!

IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE
SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE
SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND
DISPOSED OF SAFELY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF
THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13-AMPERE
SOCKET.

If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as
stated below.
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.

IMPORTANT

The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the
following code:
Blue: Neutral, Brown: Live.
As these colours may not correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured Black or Blue.
The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured Brown or Red.

WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO THE
EARTH TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED WITH THE
LETTER E, BY THE EARTH SYMBOL Ó OR
COLOURED GREEN OR GREEN/YELLOW.

THIS PLUG IS NOT WATERPROOF—KEEP DRY.

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC mains
plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug fitted and follow
the instructions below.
Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

RQT9075

2

CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT

(Inside of product)

2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Figure A Figure B

Fuse
(5 ampere)

Fuse
(5 ampere)

-If you see this symbol-

Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union

This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your
local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct
method of disposal.

Table of contents

Getting started

Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Quick Start Guide

Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings

. . . . . 10

HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

USB memory and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Regarding DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)

. . . . . . . 14

Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card) . . . . . . . 15

Basic operations

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs

Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Timer recording using G-

CODE

system

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

. . . . . . . 16

. . . . . . 18

Advanced operations

Important notes for recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Advanced recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Recording modes and approximate recording times . . . . . . . . . 21

When the format confirmation screen is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . 21

When removing a recorded disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Advanced timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 24

To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—Direct Navigator

Switching the Direct Navigator appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

To edit the group of titles [HDD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Showing the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Playing MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

To play music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Convenient functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV

Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI

ControlTM”). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

. . . . . . 27

. . . . 33

Editing

Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Editing still pictures and music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Copying

Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Copying SD Video from an SD card [EH68] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Copying SD Video from a video equipment [EH68] . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory—Copy All Pictures
Copying new still pictures on the SD card—Copy New Pictures

Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

. . . . . . .

[EH68]. . . . . .

Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Copying music from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Copying music from a USB memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

To update the Gracenote

®

Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Setting menus

Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 52

Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Status messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Deleting all the contents—Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Selecting the background style–Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first–Auto-Play Select

Enabling discs to be played on other equipment–Finalise . . . . . 56

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

. . . . . 56

Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Reference

Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO terminals . . 63

Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . . 64

Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver . . 64

Connecting a television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover

About descriptions in these operating instructions

≥These operating instructions are applicable to models

DMR-EH68 and DMR-EH58. Unless otherwise indicated,
illustrations in these operating instructions are of the black model
of DMR-EH58 for Australia and N.Z.

[EH68] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EH68 only.
[EH58] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EH58 only.

≥Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are

applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.

≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “➡ ±±”.

48
48

Getting startedQuick Start

Basic

Advanced

EditingSetting menusReference Copying

RQT9075

3

Guide

operations

operations

Included accessories

Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of February 2008. These may be subject to change.)

∏

[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]

1 Remote control

∏

[For]Asia]

2 AC mains leads

∏

1 RF coaxial cable

∏

2 Batteries

for remote control

∏

1 Audio/video cable

(N2QAYB000134)

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

1 Remote control

(N2QAYB000133)

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

1 AC mains lead

[For]Middle]East]

2 AC mains leads

For use with this unit only. Do
not use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.

For Thailand

For Saudi Arabia

The remote control information

∫ Batteries

≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.
≥Do not use rechargeable type batteries.

∫ Use

Remote control signal sensor

R6/LR6, AA

≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.

≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.

Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.

Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.

Remote control operations (➡ 6)

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.

“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS

2.0iDigital Out” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

20

30

Official DivX® Certified product.
Plays all versions of DivX
playback of DivX
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co., Ltd.

20

30

7 m directly in front of the unit

®

®

video (including DivX®6) with standard

media files.

RQT9075

4

≥SDHC Logo is a trademark.
≥Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and

are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care

The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.

∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust

Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.

∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device

The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.

∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD

If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.

≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

∫ Setup precautions

≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling

fan and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.

≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to

vibration or impact.

≥Do not place on anything that

generates heat like a video cassette
recorder, etc.

≥Do not place in an area often subject to

temperature changes.

≥Place in an area where condensation

does not occur. Condensation is a
phenomenon where moisture forms on a
cold surface when there is an extreme
change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal
damage to the unit.

≥Conditions where condensation may occur

– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving

from a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa,
or when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD

heads, etc.
– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
– During the rainy season.

In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.

DO NOT

This unit

VCR

∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or

breakdown

The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.

∫ While operating

≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The

HDD may become damaged.)

≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains

socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.

∫ When moving the unit

1Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
2Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.

2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a
short time.)

∫ HDD recording time remaining

This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)

∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content

Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).

Unit care

The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.

To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the

instructions that came with the cloth.

Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.

Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.

DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.

Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.

The heat can damage the unit.

[Note]

Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.

Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.

Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.

DO NOT

Included accessories/The remote control information/HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care/Unit care

RQT9075

5

Control reference guide

Remote control

Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.

e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]



DRIVE



SELECT









TIME SLIP







OPTION







DVD

TV

¦

¦

AV

2

1

54

8

7

DELETE

0

SKIP

STOP

R

P

R

O

T

A

G

I

V

A

N

T

C

E

R

I

D

AUDIO DISPLAY

REC MODE

REC

PAU S E

O

G

OK

C

/

CHAPTER

CH

3
6

INPUT SELECT

9

G-Code

-/--

SLOW/SEARCH

PLAY/x1.3

H

E

C

K

F

CREATE

MANUAL SKIP

STATUS

F Rec

VOL

CH

EXIT

U

N

C

T

I

O

N

M

E

N

U

RETURN
























1Turn the unit on (➡ 10)

2Select drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EH68])] (➡ 16, 17, 30)

Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].

3Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers

4To delete unnecessary recorded titles, still pictures or music

(➡ 19, 41)

5Basic operations for recording and play

6Skip the specified time (➡ 26)

7Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (➡ 26)

8Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (➡ 27, 36)

9Show OPTION menu (➡ 36)

This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,
etc.

:Select audio (➡ 26)

;Colour buttons

– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (➡ 27, 30, 32)
– for switching Video/Playlists (➡ 45)
– for manual tuning settings (➡ 57)

<Show on-screen menu (➡ 52)

=Recording functions

≥[¥ REC] Start recording (➡ 17)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (➡ 17)
≥[F Rec] Start Flexible Recording (➡ 22)

>Transmit the remote control signal

?Television operations (➡ 62)

@Channel select (➡ 17)

AInput select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (➡ 23)

B[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] Show G-

CExit the menu screen

DShow Timer Recording screen (➡ 24)

EShow FUNCTION MENU window (➡ 33)

By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.

FReturn to previous screen

GCreate chapter (➡ 26)

HSkip approx. 1 minute forward (➡ 26)

IShow status messages (➡ 53)

CODE screen (➡ 18)

RQT9075

6

Main unit

  

1Standby/on switch (Í/I) (➡ 10)

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.

2Disc tray (➡ 15)
3Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (➡ 23)
4Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (➡ 23)
5Display (➡ below)
6Open/close disc tray (➡ 15)



[EH68]



7USB port (➡ 15)
8Stop (➡ 17, 26)
9Star t play (➡ 16)
:Channel select (➡ 17)
;Star t recording (➡ 17)/Specify a time to stop recording (➡ 17)
<Remote control signal sensor
=[EH68] SD card slot (➡ 15)

Rear panel terminals (➡ 8, 9, 63, 64, 65)

OPEN/CLOSE

REC

 

 

Pull to flip down the front
panel.

OPEN/CLOSE

Control reference guide

REC

The unit’s display





1 Copying indicator

Recording indicator Playback indicator Recording/Playback

2



indicator

REC

PLAY

3Timer recording indicator
4[EH68] SD card slot indicator
5Disc indicator
6Drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EH68])] indicator
7Main display section indicator
8Recording mode indicator



REC

PLAY

REC

PLAY




[EH68]

RQT9075

7

STEP

RF
IN

RF
OUT

DIGIT

AL A

UDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

OUTA

V4 IN

V OUTT

1

Connection

≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Refer to “Additional connections” (➡ 63) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.

When the unit is not to be used for a long time

To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off

[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]

When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does not work.

Connecting a television

To the aerial

Aerial cable

1 2

VHF/UHF

RF IN

RF coaxial cable

(included)

Other connections
(➡ 9, 63)

RF
IN

RF

OPTICAL

OUT

DIGI

AL

UDIO OU

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

Audio/Video cable

Y

PB

PR

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

Television’s rear panel

AUDIO IN

VIDEO IN

R L

Red White Yellow

3

(included)

Red White Yellow

AV2 (EXT

AV1
(TV)

OUT

V4 I

)

R-AUDIO-L

[For\Saudi\Arabia[

AAV OU

S VIDEOVIDEO

To household mains socket

BE SURE TO
READ THE
CAUTION FOR
THE AC MAINS

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz)

LEAD ON PAGE
2 BEFORE
CONNECTION.

AC mains lead

(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.

[For]Middle]East]

Use the AC mains lead that matches
the socket for the area you live in.

[For]Asia]

AC mains lead with a label is for
Thailand.
AC mains lead without a label is for
areas other than Thailand.

Cooling fan

This unit’s rear panel

4

AC IN

Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal

You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB
output on this unit.

[Required]setting]

“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 60)

RQT9075

8

You can enjoy high-quality picture by changing the connection between this unit and your TV on page 8 as follows.

RF
IN

RF
OUT

DIGIT

AL A

UDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

V OUTT

OUTA

V4 IN

Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.

≥This unit incorporates HDMI
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,

native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.
[➡ 34, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.

TM

(V.1.3 with Deep Colour) technology.

TM

”)]

Television’s rear panel

HDMI IN

STEP 1 Connection

HDMI cable

RF
IN

RF

OPTICAL

OUT

DIGI

AL

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

UDIO OU

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

Y

PB

PR

AV2(EXT

AV1
(TV)

OUT

V4 I

)

R-AUDIO-L

S VIDEOVIDEO

HDMI AV OUT

AAV OU

AC IN

This unit’s rear panel

[Required]setting]

Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (➡ 60). (The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)

[Note]

≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 78) and

output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)

≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)

RQT9075

9

STEP

2

e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]

Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings

Auto-Setup is complete when you see the clock setting
menu.

Clock

DVD

¦DVD

Numbered
buttons

,,,
OK

¦

DRIVE
SELECT

1

7

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

TIME SLIP

R

O

T

A

G

I

V

A

N

T

C

E

R

I

D

OPTION

AUDIO DISPLAY

REC

TV

¦

AV

2
54

8

0

PAU SE

C

/

H

G

O

R

P

OK

CREATE

CHAPTER

REC MODE

VOL

CH

3

CH

6

INPUT SELECT

9

G-Code

-/--

SLOW/SEARCH

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

E

C

K

F

U

N

C

RETURN

MANUAL SKIP

STATUS

F Rec

T

I

O

N

M

E

N

U

RETURN

1 Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.

2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.

When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link
(➡ 34), downloading from the television starts.

Download from TV

Pos 4

Download in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel

RETURN

You can download the tuning positions from the television for
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

The country setting screen appears on the television.

Country

Australia

New Zealand

Others

If your favourite channel is not received
after selecting this, please start Auto-Setup

SELECT

Restart from Setup.

OK

RETURN

RETURN: leave OK: access

Press [3, 4] to select the country and press [OK].

Pre-set channels are set when you select “Australia” in the
country setting menu.
Auto-Setup does not start. The clock setting menu
appears (➡ step 3). If your favourite channel is not
received after selecting “Australia”, perform “Auto-Setup
Restart” (➡ 58).

Auto-Setup starts. This takes about 5 minutes.

Auto-Setup

Time Date

Number

0 9

CHANGE

OK

0 : 00 : 00

SELECT

RETURN

1

. 1

Please set clock manually.
OK: store RETURN: leave

.

2007

3 Press [2, 1] to select the item you

want to change.

This is a 24-hour clock.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy (➡ 61).
(Monthly accuracy +/– 15 seconds.)

4 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.

You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.

5 Press [OK] when you have finished

the settings.

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

Quick Start setting screen appears.

Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].

The Quick Start feature (➡ 61) enables this unit to be
ready to start recording as quick as approx. 1 second
after turning it on. You can start recording soon after
deciding you want to record something.

§

Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.

TV aspect setting screen appears.

TV Aspect

16:9 WIDE TV

4:3 TV

SELECT

OK

16:9

Pan & Scan

Letterbox

RETURN

§

6 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect

and press [OK].

≥16:9:

When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television

≥Pan & Scan:

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(➡ 78).

≥Letterbox:

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(➡ 78).

To stop partway

Press [RETURN].

∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned

correctly (➡ 57)

∫ To restart set up (➡ 58)

RQT9075

10

1

Auto-Setup in progress. Please wait.
RETURN: to cancel

RETURN

HDD and disc information

HDD and discs you can use for recording and play

(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

Disc type

Standard symbol

Hard disk drive (HDD)

[HDD]

DVD-RAM

[RAM]

DVD -R

[-R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation

Logo Data that

can be

recorded

and played

– Video

Still picture

Music

Video

Still picture

Video – ≤≤

Rewritable Play on other

players

≤ – ≤≤≤

≤≤ ≤ ≤ ≤

§1

Recording 16:9

aspect picture

Recording both M 1

§2

and M 2 for bilingual

broadcasts

–

(Either one)

Copy-once

§2

recording

(CPRM)

CPRM (➡ 78)

compatible discs

only.

§3

–

DVD-R DL

§4

Video – ≤≤

[-R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation

DVD-RW

Video ≤≤ ≤

[-RW‹V›] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation

+R

– Video – ≤ – (4:3 aspect)

[+R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation

+R DL

§4

– Video – ≤ – (4:3 aspect)

[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation

+RW

– Video ≤≤– (4:3 aspect)

[+RW]

§1

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment (➡ 56).
[RAM] can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and DVD­RAM compatible DVD players.
[-R]DL], [+R]DL] or [+RW] can be played back only on equipment
compatible with these discs.

§2

For further information (➡ 20, Important notes for recording)

§3

The audio selected in “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 59) is
recorded.

§4

[-R]DL] [+R]DL] You cannot directly record to these discs (➡ right).

≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is

necessary (➡ 55).

≥[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend

you create top menu (➡ 56).

≥Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.

For available recording times for different discs under different
recording modes, see “Recording modes and approximate
recording times” (➡ 21).

≥Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent

you from playing or recording certain discs.

≥Please see specifications (➡ 76) for compatible disc versions and

recording speeds.

∫ Recording format

This unit records video in the following formats.

DVD Video Recording format [HDD] [RAM]

This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit
television broadcasts and so on.

≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be

recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.

DVD-Video format [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]

This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD­Video.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be

recorded even if using a CPRM compatible disc.

≥After finalising the disc, you can play the disc on DVD players and

other equipment.

+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.
You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar way
as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be

recorded.

≥After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the

disc on DVD players and other equipment.

§3

–

–

(Either one)

§3

–

–

(Either one)

§3

–

–

(Either one)

§3

–

–

(Either one)

§3

–

–

(Either one)

[Note]

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on

secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this
setting “Off” if high speed copy to [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] is not necessary (The default setting is “On”. ➡ 58).

≥+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with

another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However,
discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)

≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the

discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the
recording.

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL
disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and
+R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer,
single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is
not enough space on the first layer to record a programme, the
remainder is recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between
layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme.
However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit
is switching layers.

When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut

Second recordable layer

The available
space

First recordable layer

Title 1

(Inner section
of the disc)

DVD-R DL
+R DL

Title 2

Playback direction

(Outer section
of the disc)

STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings/HDD and disc information

RQT9075

11

HDD and disc information

Play-only discs

Disc type Logo Standard

Uses

symbol

DVD-Video [DVD-V] High quality movie and music discs

DVD -RW (DVD

Video

Recording

format)

[-RW‹VR›] DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder

≥You can play programmes that allow One time only recording if they

have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.

≥By formatting (➡ 55) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video

format.

≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for

recording.

DVD-R

DivX ≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX

DVD-R DL

CD [CD]

–DivX, MP3,

JPEG

Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW

≥CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivX
≥CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3

§

)

≥CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG

Video CD [VCD]

§

Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.

≥Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW

§

)

≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating

instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

Discs that cannot be played

≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit

and not finalised (➡ 78).

≥Discs recorded with AVCHD format.
≥[For]Asia] DVD-Video with a region number other than “3” or “ALL”
≥[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] DVD-Video with a region number other than

“4” or “ALL”

≥[For]Middle]East] DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or

“ALL”

≥DVD-Audio
≥Blu-ray, HD DVD
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,

SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, etc.

Types of disc or title recorded on HDD
for the type of connected TV

When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a

title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.

(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)

TV type Disc/Titles

recorded on HDD

Multi-system TV PA L ≤

NTSC ≤

PAL T V PA L ≤

NTSC

NTSC TV PA L –

NTSC

§1

If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the
picture will not be shown correctly.

§2

Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➡ 60).

≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you

match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC) (➡ 60).

§1

≤

Yes/No

(PAL60)

§2

≤

RQT9075

12

USB memory and card information

USB memories you can use on this unit

Compatible USB memories USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP

protocol:

– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.

[EH58] USB memories for USB 2.0 High Speed work as USB 2.0 Full Speed.

≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.

CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.

≥
≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.

Format FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.

≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.
≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.

Indicated in these

[USB]

instructions by

Data that can be played or copied (≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

File format DivX MP3 Still pictures (JPEG)

Playing ≤≤≤

Copying to HDD – ≤≤

Instructions You can play DivX files

recorded with a computer onto
the USB memory (➡ 28).

You can play and copy to HDD
MP3 files recorded with a
computer onto the USB
memory (➡ 29, 50).

You can play and copy to HDD
or DVD-RAM still pictures
recorded with a computer onto
the USB memory (➡ 30, 48).

≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
≥[EH68] If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video shot with the camera to this

unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.

[Note]

≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.

HDD and disc information/USB memory and card information

Cards you can use on this unit [EH68]

Type

Indicated in these
instructions by

Data that can be recorded
and played

Instructions You can insert directly into the SD card slot.

Suitable SD cards

≥When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display

the SDHC logo can be used.

≥Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.

http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs

(This site is in English only.)

≥If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary

for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a
PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases,
format the card on this unit (➡ 55, 78).

≥This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card

Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC
Memory Cards in FAT32 format.

≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be

used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment.
SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only
compatible with SD Memory Cards.

≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
≥This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures on an SD

card.

≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent

swallowing.

SD Memory Card§ (from 8 MB to 2 GB)
SDHC Memory Card (from 4 GB to 16 GB)
MultiMediaCard

§

Including miniSD Card and microSD Card

The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.

[SD]

Still pictures (JPEG)
Video (SD Video)

§

A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.

≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (➡ 30, 48).
≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (➡ 47)
≥SD Video cannot be played directly from the SD card.

Structure of folders

¢¢¢: Numbers
XXX: Letters

Card

DCIM

___XXXXX

(Picture folder)

XXXX

____

Any folder with JPEG files
e.g.,

001

P0000001.JPG
P0000001.JPG

SD_VIDEO

(MPEG2 folder)

PRG___

MOV
MOV
PRG

MGR_INFO

___
___

___

.MOD
.MOI
.PGI

(MPEG2 information folder)

.JPG

These folders are
shown earlier in the
Album View screen
than other still picture
folders.

RQT9075

13

Regarding DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)

jpg

Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.

DivX

Playable

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

media

File
format

DivX
≥Files must have the

extension “.DIVX”, “.divx”,
“.AVI” or “.avi”.

Number
of folders

Number

Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders
(including the root folder)

§1

Maximum number of files recognizable

: 200 files

of files

Support
version

Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6)
with standard playback of DivX media files.
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.

Video
– Number of stream: Up to 1
– Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
– Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
– FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
– Number of stream: Up to 8
– Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3
– Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch

conversion.

MP3

Playable

[HDD] [CD] [USB]

media

File
format

Number
of folders
(groups)

Number
of files

MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.

Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:
300 folders (groups)
(including the root folder)

§1

Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable

:

3000 files (tracks)

(tracks)

Bit rates 32 kbps to 320 kbps

Sampling

16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz

frequency

ID3 tags compatible ([HDD] [USB])

≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,

play may not be possible.

§2

Still pictures (JPEG

Playable
media

File
format

Number
of pixels

Number
of
folders

[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [USB]
[SD]

File format: JPEG
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.

Between 34k34 and 6144k4096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)

[CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders
recognizable:300 folders

§3

[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of

)

300 folders

Number
of files

[CD] [USB] Maximum number of files

§3

recognizable

§1

:3000 files

[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of
3000 files

MOTION

not supported

JPEG

§1

Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and
other types of files is 4000.

§2

It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.

§3

When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended

formats) and Joliet

≥This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the

disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.

≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files

(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.

≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.

Other characters may not be displayed correctly.

≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is

displayed on a computer.

≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files

(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you
numbered them.

≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.

≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

≥Compatible formats: DCF

digital camera, etc.)

§4

Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established

§4

compliant (Content recorded on a

by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).

∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit

You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by

making folders as shown below. However depending on the

method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the

order you numbered the folders.

Structure of MP3 folders

[CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in
the order you want to play
them.

Structures of still picture folders

[CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are
displayed in the order
they were updated or
taken.

[RAM]

The following can be displayed on this unit.

¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters

§1

Still pictures on the root
folder can also be
displayed.

§2

Folders can be created
on other equipment.
However, these folders
cannot be selected as a
copying destination.

≥If a folder name or file

name has been input
using other equipment,
the name may not be
displayed properly or you
may not be able to play or
edit the data.

Root

Order of play

Order of play

Root

XXXX

JPEG

DCIM

001

001

003 group

Root

____

.JPG

DCIM___

___XXXXX

___XXXXX

(folder=group)

001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3

002 group

001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3

001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3

P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg

002 Folder

P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg

004 Folder

P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.

a1

XXXX

____

XXXX

____

(file=track)

003 Folder

P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg

.JPG

.JPG

a2

RQT9075

14

Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card)

Inserting discs

1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.

∫ Cartridge disc

Insert label-up.

2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.

Automatic drive select function

[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge set to
“PROTECT” (➡ 54, Cartridge-protection)]
[DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically

switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.

≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is

automatically selected.

[Note]

≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the disc

from the cartridge.

≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side

of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.

≥[RAM] When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the

protect position (➡ 54), play automatically starts when inserted in
the unit.

Insert label-up with the arrow
facing in.

Insert fully.

Inserting, removing the USB memory

Inserting the USB memory

≥Before inserting any USB memory to

this unit, ensure that the data stored
therein has been backed up.

≥Check the orientation of the USB

connector and insert it straight in.

≥Insert an USB device while the unit is

stopped, so the “USB device” screen is
displayed. Select an item and press
[OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (➡ 28, 48).

Removing the USB memory

≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory

straight out.

≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may

be damaged.

Disc and card care

∫ How to hold a disc or card

Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.

DO

∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs

Be careful about scratches and dirt.

∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc

Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

DO

∫ Handling precautions

≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc

warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)

≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt

pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.

≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static

electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.

≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other

strange things.

≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:

– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels

(rental discs, etc.).
– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart

shapes.

≥Do not place in the following areas:

– In direct sunlight.
– In very dusty or humid areas.
– Near a heater.
– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature

(condensation can occur).
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.

≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases

or cartridges when you are not using them.

DO NOT

DO NOT

DO NOT

Inserting, removing the SD card [EH68]

When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the
card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or
remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the
card’s contents.

≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.

Inserting the card

Press on the centre of the
card until it clicks into
place.

Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.

Removing the card

Automatic drive select function

≥If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card”

screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the
SD drive (➡ 28, 48).

≥If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.

If you are using a
miniSD card or a
microSD card, insert
it into the adaptor
that comes with the
card.
Insert and remove
this adaptor from the
unit.

Press on the centre of the card.





Pull it straight out.

e.g., miniSD

ADAPTER

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a
problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no
responsibility and offers no compensation for any
subsequent damage caused by such loss.

Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD

Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company.

≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this

unit.

≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer

disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this
unit.

Regarding DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)/Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card)

RQT9075

15

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs

Refer to “Advanced playback” (➡ 26) for detail
information.

2

w

e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]

1

Numbered
buttons

w

,,,

OK

OPTION

DVD

¦

DRIVE
SELECT

1

7

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

TIME SLIP

R

O

T

A

G

I

V

A

N

T

C

E

R

I

D

OPTION

AUDIO DISPLAY

REC

TV

¦

AV

2
54

8

0

PAU SE

C

/

G

O

R

P

OK

CREATE
CHAPTER

REC MODE

CH

3
6

INPUT SELECT

9

G-Code

-/--

SLOW/SEARCH

PLAY/x1.3

H

E

C

K

F

MANUAL SKIP

STATUS

F Rec

VOL

CH

EXIT

U

N

C

T

I

O

N

M

E

N

U

RETURN

3

3

RETURN

≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you

may not always be able to control play as described in these
operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

≥When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you

match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (➡ 60).

OPEN/CLOSE

REC

∫ When a menu screen appears on the television

[DVD-V]

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].

≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.

≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu

screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].

[VCD]

Press the numbered buttons to select the item.

e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5] 15: [1] ➡ [5]

≥To return to the menu screen

[DVD-V]

1 Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].

[VCD]

Press [RETURN].

[Note]

Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when

you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television

screen and so on.

RQT9075

16

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Turn on this unit.

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

HDD or DVD drive.

The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.

2 If you selected the DVD drive

Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.

≥Press the button again to close the tray.

3 Press [1](PLAY).

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [VCD]
Play starts from the point specified by the disc.

[CD]

Play starts from the beginning of the disc.

Menu operation for other type of contents

≥DivX (➡ 28)
≥MP3 (➡ 29)
≥Still pictures (JPEG) (➡ 30)
≥Music on HDD (➡ 32)
≥Music CD (➡ 32)

[Note]

≥During recording, or timer recording standby, this unit cannot play

discs or titles that do not match the “TV System” (➡ 60) setting. It is
recommended “TV System” be set to match the discs or title before
playing them.

≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,

pictures, sound, etc. to start.

Recording television programmes

Refer to “Important notes for recording” (

➡ 21

“Advanced recording” (

) for detail information.

➡ 20

) and

2

OPEN/CLOSE

REC

e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]

1

Numbered
buttons

DVD

¦

DRIVE
SELECT

1

7

DELETE

SKIP

TV

¦

AV

2
54

8

0

CH

3
6

INPUT SELECT

9

G-Code

-/--

SLOW/SEARCH

VOL

CH

w

3

3 5



PAU SE

O

R

P

REC MODE

C

/

G

OK

H

E

C

K

CREATE

CHAPTER

F Rec

PLAY/x1.3

EXIT

F

U

N

C

T

RETURN

MANUAL SKIP

STATUS

I

O

N

M

E

N

U

4

w

AUDIO

5

STOP

TIME SLIP

R

O

T

A

G

I

V

A

N

T

C

E

R

I

D

OPTION

AUDIO DISPLAY

REC

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥Turn on this unit.

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

HDD or DVD drive.

The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.

2 If you selected the DVD drive

Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.

≥Press the button again to close the tray.

3 Press [WXCH] to select the channel.

RECREC

To select with the numbered buttons:
e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [5]

15: [1] ➡ [5]

4 Press [REC MODE] to select the

recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).

≥Recording modes and approximate recording times (➡ 21)

Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on
disc. Data will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during

recording.

≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer

recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and
the timer recording will begin.

≥[HDD] [RAM] When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”

(➡ 58), you can change the audio being received by
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (Does not affect the
recording of audio.)

∫ To pause recording

Press [;].

Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)

∫ To stop recording

Press [∫].

≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to

complete recording management information after recording
finishes.

In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to
finalise them (➡ 56).

≥[USB] It is not possible to record on a USB memory.
≥[SD] It is not possible to record on a card.

Quick Start (➡ 61)

1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM and HDD

(When connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, Component Video,
Video or S Video terminals)
From the power on, recording on DVD-RAM and HDD starts in
about 1 second after the REC button is pressed. (Quick Start
Mode)

≥“Quick Start” is set to “On” at the time of purchase.
≥Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it may

take time to display the screen.

[Note]

Startup takes up to a minute when:

– You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-

RAM.
– You want to make other operations.
– The clock has not been set.

To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

During recording

Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording
time.

≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.

OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}

≥This does not work during timer recordings (➡ 18, 24) or while

using Flexible Recording (➡ 22).

≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is

reached.

To cancel

Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording

continues.

To stop recording

Press [∫].

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs/Recording television programmes

RECREC

Remaining time
on the disc

≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):

Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the
Setup menu (➡ 59).

5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.

REC

RQT9075

17

Timer recording using G-CODE system [For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

G-Code
Record

1:58 SP

DVD

30:24 SP

HDDRemain

TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00

Timer
Recording

1:58 SP

DVD

30:24 SP

HDDRemain

TUE 14.10.08. 12:54:00

Mode

StopStartName Date

HDD
DVD

20:0019:0015. 7. TUE SP HDD

1 ARD

Programme Name

TUE 14.10.08 12:56:00

Mode

Stop

HDD
DVD

HDD

Drive
space

SP

OK

20:00

Refer to “Advanced timer recording” (➡ 24–25) for
detail information.

[Australia]and]N.Z.]

DVD

¦DVD

2

3, 4

¦

DRIVE
SELECT

1

7

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

TIME SLIP

R

O

T

A

G

I

V

A

N

T

C

E

R

I

D

OPTION

AUDIO DISPLAY

REC

TV

¦

AV

2
54

8
0

PAU SE

C

/

G

O

R

P

OK

CREATE

CHAPTER

REC MODE

CH

3
6

INPUT SELECT

9

G-Code

-/--

SLOW/SEARCH

PLAY/x1.3

H

E

C

K

F

MANUAL SKIP

STATUS

F Rec

VOL

CH

EXIT

U

N

C

T

I

O

N

M

E

N

U

RETURN

1

3 Press [OK].

≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV

magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (➡ 24, step 3).

≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set

timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme
position. After you have entered the information of a TV
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.

4 Press [OK].

The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.

No.

Timer icon

“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.

&

01

Name

ARD

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)

[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connections to this unit.

≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording

(➡ 15).

≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (➡ 61).

G-CODE is a registered trademark of
Gemstar Development Corporation. The

CODE system is manufactured under

G­license from Gemstar Development
Corporation.

Entering G-

CODE numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You

can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers and magazines.

1 Press [G-Code].

Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 25).

Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.

∫ To cancel recording when recording has already

begun (➡ 24)

∫ To release the unit from recording standby

(➡ 24)

∫ Notes on timer recording (➡ 24)

2 Press the numbered buttons to enter

RQT9075

18

Input G-Code Number 0-9, and press OK.

the G-CODE number.

Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.

Deleting titles

e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]

DVD

TV

¦

¦

VOL

SKIP

AV

2
54

8

0

CH

3
6

INPUT SELECT

9

G-Code

-/--

SLOW/SEARCH

CH

DRIVE SELECT

DELETE

DRIVE
SELECT

1

7

_

DELETE

, 

PAU SE

O

R

P

REC MODE

C

/

G

OK

CHAPTER

H

E

CREATE

F Rec

PLAY/x1.3

C

K

EXIT

F

U

N

C

T

I

O

N

M

E

N

U

RETURN

MANUAL SKIP

STATUS

3

EXIT

1

RETURN

2, 3, 4, 5

“Red”

STOP

TIME SLIP

R

O

T

A

G

I

V

A

N

T

C

E

R

I

D

OPTION

AUDIO DISPLAY

REC

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)

≥A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain

before proceeding.

≥You cannot delete while recording or copying.

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 54, Setting the protection).

∫ Available disc space after deleting

≥[HDD] [RAM] The space deleted becomes available for recording.

Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles

Last title

Title Title

......

recorded

≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the

last recorded title is deleted.

Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting

Available disc space
increases after deleting

Available

disc space

Using the DELETE Navigator to delete

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

DELETE Navigator Grouped Titles

HDD

10.10.

11.10. 2

Previous

OK

OPTION

RETURN

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.

Page 02/02

Select

VIDEO

Previous

Next

PICTURE

Next

MUSIC

3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title

and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.

To show other pages (Thumbnail Display only)

Press [:, 9] to show other pages.

You can confirm the titles, that you have selected using the
option menu.
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (➡ 36,

step 4).

4 Press [OK].
5 Press [2] to select “Delete” and press

[OK].

The title is deleted.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Deleting during play

1 While playing

Press [DELETE ¢].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

The title is deleted.

/Deleting titles

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

system

CODE

Timer recording using G-

Title

Title

......

Last title
recorded

Available disc

space

Later recorded
titles

Title Deleted Last title

......

recorded

Available

disc space

This space become available for recording after all the later
recorded titles are deleted.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even

after the contents are deleted.

RQT9075

19

Important notes for recording

B

When recording a
bilingual programme

About the aspect when
recording a programme

When you want to copy
titles in high speed
mode from the HDD to
DVD-R, etc.

[HDD] [RAM]

Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.

You can change the audio during playback.
(➡ 26, Changing audio during play)

[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

Select the main or secondary audio before
recording

(➡ 59, Bilingual Audio Selection)

However in the following cases, select whether to
record the main or secondary audio:

– Recording sound in LPCM (➡ 59, Audio Mode for

Hello

XP Recording)

– “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The

default setting is “On”. ➡ 58)

M1

Hello

M2

Hallo

If you record from external equipment

– Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.

[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-RW‹V›]

≥If “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu is set to

(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”)

[HDD] [RAM]

(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)
The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect.

“Automatic” (The default setting is “Automatic” ➡ 58),
the programme will be recorded in the original aspect
used when recording started (including when
recording started at a commercial, etc.). If recorded
with a different aspect, select the correct aspect

[+R] [+RW]
The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.

(“16:9” or “4:3”).

However, in the following cases, programme will be
recorded in 4:3.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR

(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording modes will
be recorded in 4:3 aspect.

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
(The default setting is “On”. ➡ 58)

You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X
(➡ above) are necessary before recording to the HDD.

§

Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.

§

); however, the audio and aspect settings

M1

The selected
audio only is
recorded.

When recording the
“One time only
recording” broadcasts

Playing the disc on
other DVD players

Record to the HDD

High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.

HDD

It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW
or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (➡ 78) compatible DVD-RAM.

[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.

[HDD]

≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They

are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.

≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (➡ 56).

It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play
them as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record

§

or copy.

§

You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.

Record to DVD-R, etc.

Finalise

[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

Play on other DVD equipment

G
H

C

H
C
R
A
E

S

R
E
T
N
E

L
O
V
Y
A

L
P
S
I

UD
N
E
M
P
O
T

N
R
U
T
E
R

N

O
U
N
E
M

F
F

D
C

I
N
9
V

O

N
E
P
O

D
UN
O
R
R

T

U

A

S
.

E

A

P
E

E

R

D
O
M
R
O

T
I
N
O
M

E

D
O
M
E
R

U
T
C
I
P

(≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)

1

2 3 4 5

Í /I Í

CD SEQUENTIAL

DOUBLE RE-MASTER

;∫1:/65/9

DISC

DISC EXCHANGE DISC SKIP<OPEN/CLOSE

RQT9075

20

[+RW]

If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (➡ 56).

Recording to DVD-R DL
and +R DL

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

≥It is not possible to record to both the HDD and the DVD drive simutaneously.

Advanced recording

Recording modes and approximate recording times

Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)

Recording Mode HDD DVD-RAM DVD-R

DVD-RW

§1

+R

+RW

(4.7 GB)

XP (High picture

[EH58]

(250 GB)

[EH68]

(320 GB)

Single-

sided

(4.7 GB)

Double-

sided

(9.4 GB)

55 hours 71 hours 1 hour 2 hours 1 hour 1 hour 45 min. 1 hour 45 min.

DVD-R DL

(8.5 GB)

quality recording
mode)

SP (Standard

110 hours 142 hours 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours 3 hours 35 min. 3 hours 35 min.

recording mode)

LP (Long

221 hours 284 hours 4 hours 8 hours 4 hours 7 hours 10 min. 7 hours 10 min.

recording mode)

EP (Extra long
recording mode)

FR (Flexible
Recording

§4

Mode)

§1

It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.

§2

When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6 Hours)” in the Setup menu (➡ 58).
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when using “EP (8 Hours)”.

§3

You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

§4

When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW

§4

441 hours

hours§2)

(331

441 hours
maximum

567 hours

(426 hours§2)

567 hours

maximum

8 hours

(6 hours§2)

8 hours

maximum

16 hours

(12 hours§2)

8 hours

maximum

for one side

8 hours

(6 hours§2)

8 hours

maximum

14 hours 20 min.

(10 hours 45 min.§2)

14 hours 20 min. Approximately

discs.

§3

+R DL

(8.5 GB)

9 hours with video

quality equivalent

to LP mode.

§3

Important notes for recording/Advanced recording

≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.

Use “EP (6 Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.

[HDD]

≥You can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)

[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]

≥You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.

[+R] [+RW]

≥You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.

FR (Flexible Recording Mode)

You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.

≥When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.

RECREC

When the format confirmation screen is
displayed

[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.

Format

This disc is not formatted properly.
Do you want to format the disc now ?

SELECT

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To format a disc

“Deleting all the contents—Format” (➡ 55)

NoYes

RETURN

OK

When removing a recorded disc

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.

Finalise the disc so that it can be played
on other DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising. This may take up to min.

∫ To finalise the disc

Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.

≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a

disc name, select “Top Menu” (➡ 56), “Auto-Play Select” (➡ 56) or
“Disc Name” (➡ 54) in “DVD Management” before finalising.

Finalise

Press the REC button to start finalise.

Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
The disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalising.

∫ To open the tray without disc finalisation

Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.

RQT9075

21

Advanced recording

Flexible Rec

Start Cancel

Record in FR mode.

Set rec. time

8 Hour 00 Min.

Maximum rec. time

8 Hour 00 Min.

Flexible Recording

(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR
mode.

∫ Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these

kinds of situations.

[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an

appropriate recording mode difficult

≥When you want to record a long programme with the best picture

quality possible

[HDD]

≥When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be

copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly

≥You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording

mode when copying, to fit the disc space.

e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc

If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.

If you try to record a 90 minute
programme in XP mode, only the first

4.7GB

DVD-RAM

If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.

DVD-RAM

If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc
perfectly.

Necessary space for recording

4.7GB

4.7GB

DVD-RAM

4.7GB

DVD-RAM

60 minutes will fit on the disc and the
30 minute balance will not get
recorded.
≥Another disc is necessary.

However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.

3 When you want to start recording

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”
and press [OK].

≥Recording starts.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in

the display.

To exit the screen without recording

Press [RETURN].

To stop recording partway

Press [∫].

To show the remaining time

Press [STATUS].

Remaining
time of
recording

e.g., HDD

HDD

REC 0:59

ARD

M 1 / M 2

L R

Playing while you are recording

[HDD] [RAM]

Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback

Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.

There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.

To stop play

Press [∫].

To stop recording

2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].

To stop timer recording

2 seconds after play stops
1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].

Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play

≥You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press

[DRIVE SELECT].

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during

recording.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title

and press [OK].

≥There is no sound output while searching forward or

backward.

XP

SP
LP
EP

RQT9075

22

Preparation

≥Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.

1 While stopped

Press [F Rec].

Maximum recording time

This is the maximum recording
time in EP (8 Hours) mode.

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and

“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
recording time.

≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered

buttons.

≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.

To stop play

Press [∫].

To exit the Direct Navigator screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To stop recording

After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
2 If the recording is on the other drive

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.

3 Press [∫].

To stop timer recording

After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
2 If the recording is on the other drive

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.

3 Press [∫].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].

[Note]

“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).

Copying from a video cassette recorder

e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front

You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.

≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.

OPEN/CLOSE

REC

This unit

L/MONO - AUDIO- R

VIDEO

DV IN

S VIDEO

Yellow White Red

AV3 IN

DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes

are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at
each break in the images and the playlist is created automatically.

Preparation

1 Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the

equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (➡ left).

2 Turn on the main unit.
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,

change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 60).

DV cable

(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)

Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.

If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural

Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.

§

The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.

When recording from the unit’s DV terminal

≥Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”

in the Setup menu (➡ 59).

≥When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),

you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 58) is set to “On” and you

make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 58) of the Setup menu.

About the aspect when recording a programme (➡ 20)

S Video

§

cable

Other video equipment

Audio/Video
cable

[Note]

≥If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the

recording will start and the copying will stop.

≥If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then

the video quality will be degraded.

Manual recording

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
≥When recording bilingual programmes (➡ 20, Important notes for

recording)

≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,

change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (➡ 60).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)

≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “Input

NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (➡ 53).

≥Check the time on the unit is correct.

1 While stopped

Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.

e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select “A3”.

2 Start play on the other equipment.
3 When you want to start recording

Press [¥ REC].

Recording starts.

1 Turn on the DV equipment, and pause

play at the point you want recording to
start.

The following screen appears.

DV Auto Rec

DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?

Rec to HDD Rec to DVD Cancel

SELECT

RETURN

OK

≥When the screen is not displayed

After performing step 1
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].
4Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec” and press [OK].

➡ Go to step 3 (➡below)

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to HDD”

or “Rec to DVD” and press [OK].

3 Press [REC MODE] to select the

recording mode.

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and

press [OK].

Recording starts.

When recording finishes

The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK] to finish DV automatic
recording.

To stop recording

Press [∫].

[Note]

≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can

be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.

≥
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It

cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)

≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be

input properly.

≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will

not be recorded.

≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.

If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.

If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (➡ left).

Advanced recording/Copying from a video cassette recorder

To skip unwanted parts

Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)

To stop recording

Press [∫].

Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.

≥Using Flexible Recording (➡ 22), you can record the content of a

video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.

RQT9075

23

Advanced timer recording

Timer
Recording

1:58 SP

DVD

30:24 SP

HDDRemain

TUE 14.10.08. 12:54:00

Mode

StopStartName Date

HDD
DVD

22:3022:0015. 7. TUE HDD

1 ARD

Programme Name

SP

TUE 14.10.08 12:56:00

Mode

Stop

HDD
DVD

HDD

Drive
space

SP

OK

20:00

Manually programming timer
recordings

1 Press [PROG/CHECK].

Timer
Recording

No.

01

&

Name

ARD

HDDRemain

Date

15. 7. TUE

19:00

New Timer Programme

30:24 SP

StopStart

20:00

1:58 SP

DVD

TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00

HDD

Drive

Mode

space

DVD

HDD

SP

OK

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer

Programme” and press [OK].

3 Press [1] to move through the items

and change the items with [3, 4].

≥Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and

Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.

≥You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station

Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with
the numbered buttons.

≥Date

[.

Date: Current date up to one month later minus

l

;:

l

Daily timer: SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI

l

;:

a.

Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT

Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the Direct Navigator
screen (➡ 27) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.

≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording

drive.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➡ 25, Relief Recording).

≥You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording

mode.

≥[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (➡ 25)

ON!)OFF

≥Programme Name

Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK].
(➡ 42, Entering text)

one day

4 Press [OK].

The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed.

No.

Name

Timer icon

“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.

&

01

ARD

To cancel recording when recording
has already begun

1 While the unit is on

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
recording drive and press [∫].

Stop Recording

Timer recording in progress.
Stop this timer recording?
It will be cancelled if you stop.

Stop Recording

SELECT

Cancel

RETURN

OK

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop

Recording” and press [OK].

If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.

To release the unit from recording
standby

Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].

1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme

and press the “Red” button.

≥The timer icon “F” (➡ 25) disappears from the timer

recording list.

≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as

even one timer icon “F” (➡ 25) remains in the timer
recording list.

≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording

standby.

Notes on timer recording

≥When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded using a

different TV system cannot be played unless the TV system is
changed in the Setup menu (➡ 60) or the timer recording has
completed or has been cancelled.

≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is

turned on/off.

≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when

playing.

≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal

speed mode (➡ 43).

≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains

turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.

≥If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last

10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time,
the “F” flashes on the unit’s display.

≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start

immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at
the beginning of the later programmes.

Programme

Programme

Not recorded

RQT9075

24

Check to make sure “OK”
is displayed (➡ 25).

Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.

Recorded Recorded

≥If the actual broadcasting times of timer recordings overlap, the

recording that starts first always has priority, and the recording of
the later programme will start only after the first timer recording has
finished.

Check, change or delete a programme

Timer
Recording

1:58 SP

DVD

30:24 SP

HDDRemain

TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00

Mode

StopStartName Date

HDD
DVD

22:3022:00SUN HDD

1 ARD

Programme Name

SP

RENEW

ON

≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer

recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].

Press [PROG/CHECK].

Icons

F Timer recording standby is activated.

[ This programme is currently recording.

The times overlap those in another programme.
Recording of the programme with the later start time
starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.

You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon
disappears the next time the timer programme starts
recording.

The disc was full so the programme failed to record.

The programme was copy-protected so it was not
recorded.

X The programme did not complete recording because

the disc is dirty or some other reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording

(➡ right).
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD

(Displayed while recording.)

HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD

Timer
Recording

No.

Name

30:24 SP

HDDRemain

Date

StopStart

New Timer Programme

1:58 SP

DVD

TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00

HDD
DVD

Mode

Drive
space

Relief Recording

When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
≥The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were relief-

recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (➡ 27).

≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the

programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.

Auto Renewal Recording

[HDD]

If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or ever y
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.

This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily
recording is selected.

1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme

and press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”

column.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press

[OK].

Advanced timer recording

Press OK to store new programme.

OK

RETURN

Message displayed in the “Drive space” line

OK: Displayed if the recording can fit in the

remaining space.

> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display

will show until when recordings can be made (up
to a maximum of one month from the present
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.

! : It may not be possible to record because:

≥there is not enough space left
≥the number of possible titles has reached its

maximum.

Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to

the HDD.

∫ To change a programme

Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (➡ 24,
step 3)

∫ To delete a programme

Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].

You can also delete a programme with the following steps

1 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

∫ To exit the timer recording list

Press [PROG/CHECK].

[Note]

≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or

while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.

≥Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal

Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.

≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may

not be recorded completely.

Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.

RQT9075

25

Advanced playback

Operation during play

≥Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.

Stop

Pause

Search

Skip

Starting from
a selected title

Quick View

[HDD] [RAM]

Slow-motion

[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD]

Press [∫].

The stopped position is memorized.

Resume play function

Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this
position.

Stopped position

≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the

position is cleared in some cases.

≥The position is cleared if the tray is

opened.

≥[CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX :The position is

cleared if the unit is turned off.

Press [;].

Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart
play.

Press [6] or [5].

≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R]

[+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Audio is heard during first level search

forward.
[CD] and MP3 : Audio is heard during all
levels of search.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all
levels of search.

During play or while paused,
press [:] or [9].

Skip to the title, chapter or track you want
to play.
≥Each press increases the number of

skips.

≥DivX : Press [:] to return to the

beginning of the title currently playing.

Press the numbered buttons.

Play starts from the selected title, chapter
or track.

≥[HDD]

e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

≥MP3 and JPEG

e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

≥Other discs

Input a 2-digit number
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]

≥This works only when

stopped (the screen
on the right is displayed on the
television) with some discs.

≥[VCD] (with playback control)

If you press the numbered buttons while
stopped (the above screen is displayed
on the television) you can cancel PBC.
(Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s
display.)

Press and hold [1](PLAY/
a1.3).

Play speed is quicker than normal.
≥Press again to return to normal speed.

While paused, press [6] or
[5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is

continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).

Frame-by­frame

[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[VCD]

Skipping the
specified time
(Time Slip)

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL]

(This function does
not work with
finalised discs.)

[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Manual Skip

[HDD] [RAM]

[-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL]

(This function does
not work with
finalised discs.)

[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Create
Chapter

(➡ 36, Title/Chapter)
[HDD] [RAM]

While paused, press [2] (2;)

or [1] (;1).

Each press shows the next frame.

≥Press and hold to change in succession

forward or backward.

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.

1 Press [TIME SLIP].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the

time and press [OK].

Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time

increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1
minute intervals. (Press and hold for
10-minute intervals.)

This automatically disappears after

approximately 5 seconds. To show the

screen again press [TIME SLIP] again.

-

5 min

Press [MANUAL SKIP].

Each time you press, play restarts

approximately 1 minute later.

Press [CREATE CHAPTER].

Chapters are divided at the point pressed.

≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a

chapter.

Changing audio during play

Press [AUDIO].

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
LR>L>R
^---------------}

HDD

PLAY

L R

e.g., “L R” is selected

[DVD-V]

You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (➡ 52, Soundtrack).

Soundtrack

[Note]

You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.
≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R

DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.

≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP

Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 59).

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting

is “On” ➡ 58).

1 ENG §Digital 3/2.1ch

e.g., English is selected.

RQT9075

26

Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—Direct Navigator

All Titles

PICTURE/MUSIC

Table Display

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them. You can
also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title

and press [OK].

You can also select titles with the numbered buttons (All Titles
screen only).
e.g., [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]

5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 15: [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].
(Thumbnail Display only)
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Direct Navigator screen icons

[ Currently recording.

Title protected.

Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)

t Title cannot be played

[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.]

Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(➡ 25, Relief Recording)

Title with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 78,
CPRM)

Groups of titles ([HDD] only)

Title that was recorded but has not yet been played
([HDD] only)

(NTSC)
(PAL)

Title recorded using a different encoding system
from that of the TV system currently selected on the
unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit

(➡ 60).

Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance

“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD]
“Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”

1 While the Direct Navigator screen is displayed

Press [OPTION].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

e.g.,

“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”

“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]

Grouped Titles screen

Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording mode
are bundled and displayed as one item.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

10.10.

11.10.

DolphinesChantal Show

VIDEO

PICTURE

2

[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

MUSIC

All Titles screen

Displays all titles.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles

HDD

007

008

ARD 10.10. FRI

ARD 11.10. SAT

- - -

Previous

OK

OPTION

RETURN

Page 02/02

Select

VIDEO

009

ARD 18.10. SAT

- - -- - -

Previous

Next

PICTURE

Next

MUSIC

(in Thumbnail Display)

To sort the titles for easy searching

[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)

This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback
from many titles.

1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

If you select an item other than “No.”
≥The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the

selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)

≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being

played back.

≥If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to another

Direct Navigator screen, the sort will be cancelled.

To play grouped titles [HDD]

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press [OK].

To edit the group of titles [HDD]

[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
≥Press [;] to cancel.

2 Press [OPTION].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press

[OK].

Create Group:

Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK].
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.

Release Grouping:

Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].
≥When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group

are released.

≥When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from

the group.

∫ Regarding the group name

The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

10.10.

11.10.

DolphinesChantal Show

Previous

OK

OPTION

RETURN

Page 02/02

Select

2

Previous

VIDEO

PICTURE

Next

To change the group name

1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION].
2Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
3Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Name” and press [OK].
4 Enter the name. (➡ 42, Entering text)
≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will

not be changed.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

MUSIC

HDD

Next

Dolphines Dolphines

Previous

OK

OPTION

RETURN

ARD 18.10. SATARD 11.10. SAT

Page 01/01

Select

Create Group

Release Grouping

VIDEO

Next

Advanced playback/Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—Direct Navigator

(in Thumbnail Display)

Select the item marked with and press [OK] to display the
bundled titles.

OK

RETURN

Previous

OPTION

Page 02/02

Select

Previous

Next

Next

RQT9075

27

Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures

Playback

Play Mode:DivX
Select file type.

DivX
JPEG
MP3

Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.

Showing the menu screen

[CD]

1 Insert the disc.
2 If the disc contains different file types

Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

Otherwise,

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[USB] [SD]
1 Insert the USB memory or the SD card.

USB device

Play Video (DivX)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3)

Copy Music (MP3)

Update CD database on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

OK

2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

∫ Changing the file type to play

[CD] [USB]

1 Press [RETURN] several times to exit the menu.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

FUNCTION MENU

OK

Play Mode : DivX

RETURN

[CD]

3

CD(DivX/JPEG/MP3)

Playback

Recording

Copy

To Others

Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press
[OK].

[USB]

1 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press

[OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “USB device” and

press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

SD Card

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

SELECT

RETURN

OK

Playing DivX video contents

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.

1 Show DivX Menu screen.

(➡ left, Showing the menu screen)

No.

001 ABC.avi

OK

RETURN

Folder1 : 00025

Name of Title

Page 001/001

Tree

Total Title : 001

DivX Menu

CD (DivX)

≥Files are treated as titles.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and

press [OK].

Play starts on the selected title.
≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]

15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

To stop playing

Press [∫].

To show other pages

Press [:, 9].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[Note]

≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from

showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.

≥Successive play is not possible.
≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive

or the DVD drive.

Using the tree screen to find a folder

1 While the file list is displayed

Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display
the tree screen.

F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.

DivX Menu

CD (DivX)

Folder

12.02.2004
Image001

Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010

DATA1
DATA2

OK

RETURN

F 1/21

You cannot select folders
that contain no compatible
files.

RQT9075

28

2Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].

The file list for the folder appears.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

Regarding DivX VOD content

DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first
need to register the unit.
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more
information about DivX VOD, visit www.divx.com/vod

Display the unit’s registration code.

(➡ 61, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)

Setup

Tun in g

Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection

Others

≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another

registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.

≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code

different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)

Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times

Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)

When playing this content
≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if

– you press [Í DVD] .
– you press [∫].
– you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content

or the start of the content being played.
– timer recording starts on the HDD.
– you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.

≥Resume functions do not work.

DivX Registration

DivX (R) Video On Demand

Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX

To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod

OK

RETURN

8 alphanumeric characters

Using the tree screen to find a group

1 While the file list is displayed

Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.

Selected group No. /Total groups

If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.

MP3 Menu

CD

G 8
T 14
TOTAL
40/111

Number

–

0 9

SELECT

OK

RETURN

Tre e

MP3 music

001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops

007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard number
001 Piano solo
002 Vocal

G 7/25

You cannot select
groups that contain no
compatible files.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press

[OK].

The file list for the group appears.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures

Playing MP3 files

[CD] [USB]
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a CD-R/CD­RW and USB memory.
≥You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording or

copying.

1 Show MP3 Menu screen.

(➡ 28, Showing the menu screen)

Selected group

G: Group No.
T: Track No. in the group
TOTAL:

Track No./Total tracks in all
groups

MP3 Menu

CD

G 1
T 1
TOTAL
1/111

Number

–

0 9

Prev.
Next

SELECT

OK

RETURN

GroupNo.

1 : My favorite

Total Track

001 Both Ends Freezing

1

002 Lady Starfish

2

003 Life on Jupiter

3

004 Metal Glue

4

005 Paint It Yellow

5

006 Pyjamamama

6

007 Shrimps from Mars

7

008 Starperson

8

009 Velvet Cuppermine

9

010 Ziggy Starfish

10

Page 001/024

Tree

≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.

2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and

press [OK].

Play starts on the selected track.

≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]

15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

To stop playing

Press [∫].

To show other pages

Press [:, 9].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

RQT9075

29

Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures

Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.

Playing still pictures

[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [USB] [SD]

You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a CD-R/
CD-RW and USB memory.

≥You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.
≥Inserting, removing the SD card [EH68] (➡ 15)

1 Show Album View screen.

[CD] [USB] [SD]
(➡ 28, Showing the menu screen)

[HDD] [RAM]
While stopped

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green”
button to select “PICTURE”.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View

HDD

001

- - -

OK

Previous

RETURN

0

Total 5

- - -

Page 01/01

OPTION

VIDEO

- - -

2

0

Total 3

Date: 1. 2.2006Date: 1. 1.2006

- - -

Next

Press OK to show

Slide Show

pictures.

Direct Navigator screen icons

Picture and folder protected.

Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])

Album View screen

MUSIC

PICTURE

Regarding Album View
screen ➡ right

∫ Regarding Album View screen

Still pictures copied from USB memories and SD cards are grouped
by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (➡ 40).

[HDD] [RAM]

Grouped by date

002

Date: 10.10. 2007

Number of pictures/Shooting date

[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [USB] [SD]

Album

002

Zoological park

Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name
≥Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC

etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].

Tot al 6 8

Tot al 2 410.10. 07

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

album and press [OK].

You can also select album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View

HDD

Album Name

103__DVD

0001

0002 0003 0004

0005 0006 0007 0008

0009

---- ---- ----

Page 001/001

Previous

OK

OPTION

RETURN

Slide Show

PICTURE

Next

e.g., HDD

3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still

picture and press [OK].

You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (➡ 31)

RQT9075

30

To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Useful functions during still picture play

Start Slide Show
Slide Show Setting

Rotate

Zoom in
Zoom out

Properties

You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.

While the Album View screen is displayed

1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2Press [1](PLAY).

You can also start Slide Show with the following steps.

While the Album View screen is displayed

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].

≥To change the display interval

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval”.
3 Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [OK].

≥Repeat Play

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.
3 Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].

While playing

1 Press [OPTION].
2Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and

press [OK].

≥Rotation information will not be stored.

– [CD] [USB] Still pictures
– When disc or album is protected
– When played on other equipment
– When copying pictures
– When changing date

≥If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation

information may not be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen.

While playing

1 Press [OPTION].
2Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].

≥To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and

press [OK].

≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.

While playing

Press [STATUS] twice.

To exit the picture properties screen

Press [STATUS].

e.g., HDD

18:53:50 11.10.

Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date 1. 1. 2005 No. 3 / 9

Shooting date

Start Slide Show

Slide Show Setting

Rotate RIGHT

Rotate LEFT

Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT

Zoom in

Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures

OK

RETURN

OK

RETURN

RQT9075

31

Playing music

To play music CD

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

1 Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

CD

Play Music

Copy Music

SELECT

RETURN

OK

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”

and press [OK].

The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (➡ 50)
and searches for the title information.

POWERED BY

If search results indicate that multiple titles were found

Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and

press [OK].

You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [5]

15: [1] ➡ [5]

MP3

e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5] 115: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5] 1115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[Note]

≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.
≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while

the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed. To
return to the previous screen, press [OK].

Useful functions during music play

Operations during play

Stop

Pause

Search

Skip

Press [∫].

The stopped position is memorized.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this
position.
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the

position is cleared.

≥The position is cleared if the unit is

turned off.

Press [;].

Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart
play.

Press [6] or [5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

During play or while paused, press
[:] or [9].

Skip to the track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of

skips.

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback continues.

To play music recorded on HDD

Copying music to HDD (➡ 50)

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play CD on

HDD” or “Play MP3 on HDD” and
press [OK].

Play Music

Please select music to play.

Play CD on HDD

Play MP3 on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

OK

3 Press [3, 4] to select the album/

group and press [OK].

You can also select the album/group with the numbered
buttons.
e.g.,

5: [0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]
15: [0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]
115: [1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

Repeat Play

[HDD]

Sort

[HDD]

Properties

[HDD] [CD]

You can select the item which you want to
repeat.

While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play

Setting” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and

press [OK].

≥Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.

You can change the order of the Album
View (CD)/Group View (MP3)
alphabetically.

While Album View (CD) screen or Group
View (MP3) screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and

press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name”

or “Group Name” and press [OK].

To cancel the sorted screen

Press [3, 4] to select “No.” and press
[OK].

While Track View (CD) screen or Track
View (MP3) screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”

and press [OK].
≥To exit the Properties screen, press

[OK].

RQT9075

32

4 Press [3, 4] to select the track and

press [OK].

You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

CD

e.g.,
5: [0] ➡ [5]
15: [1] ➡ [5]

Convenient functions

FUNCTION MENU window

By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.

HDD

FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

To Others

OK

RETURN

Remain

30:00 SP

2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and

press [OK].

≥If you select “To Others” and press [OK], the following

screen appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press
[OK].

e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

To Others

OK

RETURN

≥If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous

screen.

Playback You can select and play recorded

Recording You can start programming timer

Delete You can delete items using DELETE

Copy You can copy recorded titles using COPY

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

G-Code Record

Advanced Copy You can make a copy list and then copy

[EH68]

Copy New Pictures

Playlists You can create playlists by grouping your

Flexible Rec The unit sets the best possible picture

DV Auto Rec DV automatic recording function (➡ 23)

Setup You can change the unit’s settings using

HDD Management
DVD Management

[EH68]

Card Management

Copy Music CD You can start copying music CD to the

USB device This unit displays the menu to help you

30:00 SP

Remain

G-Code Record

Advanced Copy

Playlists

Flexible Rec

DV Auto Rec

Setup

HDD Management

programmes (➡ 16, 27), change the Play
Mode (DivX, JPEG, MP3) (➡ 28), etc.

recording (➡ 24).

Navigator (➡ 19, 41).

Navigator (➡ 44).

You can make timer recording setting by
entering G-

(➡ 45).

You can copy the new still pictures on an
SD card (➡ 48).

favourite chapters (➡ 38).

quality that fits the recording within the
remaining disc space (➡ 22).

Setup menu (➡ 57).

You can manage the HDD, discs and
cards through formatting, finalising and
other operations (➡ 54).

HDD (➡ 50).

start USB operations (➡ 28).
≥“USB device” appears when a

compatible USB device is connected.

CODE numbers (➡ 18).

To pause the TV programme you are
watching—Pause Live TV

You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s
tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is
useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

1 Turn on the television and select the

appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.

2 Turn on this unit and press [WXCH]

to select the channel.

3 When you want to pause the TV programme

Press [;].

HDD



ARD

L R

This icon indicates that Pause Live TV is working. You can
turn off this icon (➡ 59, Pause Live TV Icon).

4 When you want to resume

Press [1](PLAY)

≥The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode

(➡ 21) regardless of the recording mode and the drive
selected before starting saving.

≥At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be

temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending on
the HDD free space.)

Operation during Pause Live TV

Search

Pause

Quick View

Slow­motion

Stop Pause
Live TV

[Note]

≥The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer

recording starts.

≥The Pause Live TV function does not work if the clock is not set.
≥The Pause Live TV function does not work

– while recording
– while timer recording, etc.

≥You cannot change audio during resume play.
≥The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is

full or the saving lasts 8 hours.

≥The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after

started.

Press [6, 5].

Press [;].

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.

Press and hold [1](PLAY/a1.3).

≥Press again to return to the normal speed.

While paused, press [6] or

[5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps.

≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

1Press [∫].

2Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”

and press [OK].

Playing music/Convenient functions

To exit the FUNCTION MENU window

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

RQT9075

33

Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)

You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control”.

What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?

VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or
receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating
instructions for connected equipment for operational details.

≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC

(Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’
equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.

≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.

“HDAVI Control 3” is the newest standard (current as of December, 2007) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This
standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.

≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’ equipment supporting VIERA Link function.

Preparation

1 Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable (➡ 9) or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (➡ 64).
2 Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (➡ 60). (The default setting is “On”.)
3 Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment (e.g., TV).
≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be used as “HDAVI Control”.
4 Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI Control”

function works properly.

Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.

What you can do with “HDAVI Control”

Download from the TV

(When the TV is on)

Easy playback

(When the TV is off)

Power on link

Power off link

§1

This button is available only when this unit is on.

§2

When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.

§3

Only for Australia and N.Z.

When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data is automatically copied from the TV
to the unit and the TV stations are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as
on the TV (➡ 10).

When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to
HDMI input mode and the TV displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]

When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and
displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]

≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3

The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.

When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is
automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback
or when the unit set to a timer recording.
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when
recording, copying, finalising etc.
≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable,

the receiver will also turn off.

§1

, [1](PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [PROG/CHECK], [G-Code]§3 etc.

§1

, [1](PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [PROG/CHECK], [G-Code]§3 etc.

[Note]

≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.

RQT9075

34

Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.

Easy control only with VIERA remote control

If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more
convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using the following buttons on the TV remote control.
[3, 4, 2, 1], [OK], [RETURN], [EXIT], [OPTION] and the coloured buttons.
Use the remote control for this unit to operate any other buttons (numbered buttons, etc.) that are not listed above.

≥The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote control other than those listed above.
≥The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.

”)

TM

Using the FUNCTION
MENU window to
operate this unit

≥This function is available with the

TV which has “HDAVI Control 2”
or “HDAVI Control 3” function.

Pause live TV
programme

≥This function is available with the

TV which has “HDAVI Control 3”
function.

Using the OPTION
menu window to
operate this unit

≥This function is available with the

TV which has “HDAVI Control 2”
or “HDAVI Control 3” function.

Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.

1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window

using the TV remote control.

≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.

2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV

remote control, and press [OK].

About the FUNCTION MENU
window (➡ 33).

You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD.
This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be
deleted.

Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.

HDD

FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

To Others

OK

RETURN

Remain

30:00 SP

1 When you want to pause the TV programme

Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.

≥This unit turns on automatically.

2 When you want to resume

Display the Control Panel (➡ below) and press [OK].

≥The TV programme resumes.

To stop Pause Live TV

Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed.

Refer to “Note” on page 33, “To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV”.

By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (➡ below) and display the
Top Menu for DVD-Video.

1 Press [OPTION].

e,g.,

Control Panel

FUNCTION MENU

Top Menu

Menu

Drive Select

OK

RETURN

[Note]

You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top
Menu for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD­Video is copying.

2 Select an item then press [OK].

Control Panel Control Panel is displayed

FUNCTION
MENU

Top M e n u

[DVD-V]

Menu [DVD-V] Menu is displayed (➡ 16).

Drive Select Select the HDD, DVD or SD

Rotate RIGHT
(JPEG)

Rotate LEFT
(JPEG)

Zoom in (JPEG) Enlarge or shrink the still

Zoom out
(JPEG)

(➡ below).

FUNCTION MENU window is
displayed (➡ above).

Top menu is displayed (➡ 16).

drive

Rotate the still picture (➡ 31).

picture (➡ 31).

Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

Using the Control
Panel

Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote
control.
Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (➡ above).

The Control Panel is displayed (➡ right).
≥When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.

–[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]:

Play, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.

≥While playing still pictures

–[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit

the screen.

∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode

Press [Í DVD] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.

∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”

Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (➡ 60).

Control Panel

Search

Play

Pause

Stop

Exit

Search

RQT9075

35

Editing titles/chapters

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Chapter View

008 ARD 11.10.

------ ---

HDD

0:31.24

[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Title/Chapter

Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one
chapter.

Title

Chapter

Start End

[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each
section between the division points becomes a chapter. (➡ 26, 37,
Create Chapter)

Title

Chapter

Chapter Chapter Chapter

[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
playlist (➡ 38).

≥The maximum number of items on a disc:

[HDD]

– Titles: 499
– Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
– Titles:99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
– Chapters:Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)

[Note]

≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot

be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.

≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.

dividing a title etc).

≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the

free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.

Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters

You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded
programmes.

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connection to this unit.

≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded

title to be edited.

≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 54, Setting the protection).

1 During play or while stopped

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, Press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

008

ARD 10.10. ARD 11.10.

Previous

OK

OPTION

RETURN

Page 02/02

Select

VIDEO

Previous

Next

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

PICTURE

Next

MUSIC

Title View screen

3 Press [OPTION].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and

press [OK].

Enter Name
Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Delete

Properties

Edit

Create Group

Release Grouping

Chapter View

Table Display

All Titles

PICTURE/MUSIC

Partial Delete
Change Thumbnail

Divide Title

To edit the group of titles [HDD] (➡ 27)

Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance (➡ 27)

≥Playing still pictures (➡ 30)
≥To play music recorded on HDD

(➡ 32)

∫ If you select “Chapter View”

Refer to “Title
operations”
(➡ 37).

5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

chapter.

To start play ➡ Press [OK].
To edit ➡ Step 6.

VIDEO

Chapter View screen

RQT9075

36

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ above)

6 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

Delete Chapter

Create Chapter

Combine Chapters

Title View

≥You can go back to Title View.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Refer to “Chapter
operations” (➡ 37).

Title operations

Properties

No.

Name

Date

026

ARD

11.10.2006

Time
Rec time

12:19
0:30 (SP)MON

Dinosaur

t

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

Change Thumbnail

Change

Finish

0:00.00

- -:- -.- -

Change

HDD



008

ENTER

Start play and select the image

of a thumbnail.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title

Preview

Finish

0:43.21

PLAY

008

Divide

- -:- -.- -

Divide

HDD

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter

Create

Finish

0:43.21

PLAY

008

HDD

After performing steps 1–4 (➡ 36)

Delete

§

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Properties

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded

title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (➡ 19).

Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.

Enter Name

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Set up Protection
Cancel Protection

[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Partial Delete

[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)

Change Thumbnail

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

(➡ below, For your reference)

Divide Title

[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)

§

Multiple editing is possible.

You can give names to recorded titles.
(➡ 42, Entering text)

≥[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.

§

If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

§

The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.

You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.

1 Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the

section you want to delete.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title
View.

1 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2 Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a

thumbnail is shown.

To change the thumbnail

Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at
the point you want to change.

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

You can divide a title into two.

1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].

To confirm the division point

Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10
seconds before and after the division point.)

To change the division point

Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the
title.

[Note]

≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (➡ 78) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
≥[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Ti

HDD

007 008

ARD 10.10. FRI ARD 11.10.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete

HDD

008

OK

RETURN

PLAY

Start End

- -:- -.- - - -:- -.- -

VIDEO

Start

End

Next

Finish

VIDEO

VIDEO

Editing titles/chapters

0:43.21

Chapter operations

After performing steps 1–6 (➡ 36)

Delete Chapter

[HDD] [RAM]

Create Chapter

[HDD] [RAM]
(➡ below, For your reference)

Combine Chapters

[HDD] [RAM]

§

Multiple editing is possible.

For your reference

≥Use Search (➡ 26), Time Slip (➡ 26) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (➡ 26) and Frame-by-frame (➡ 26).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).

§

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (➡ below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.

(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)

Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the
title.

VIDEO

1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.

≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].

Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].

≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.

RQT9075

37

Creating, editing and playing playlists

Playlists Playlist View

- -

- -

Create

HDD

- -

- -- -

- -

You can arrange the chapters (➡ 36) to create a playlist.

Chapter

Playlist

Title

Chapter Chapter Chapter Chapter

Chapter

Chapter

Title

Copying (➡ 43) a playlist will create a title.

≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much

capacity.

≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles

and source chapters.

≥You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.

[HDD] [RAM]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:

– Playlists: 99
– Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000

(Depends on the state of recording.)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the

items entered will not be recorded.

Creating playlists

[HDD] [RAM]

Preparation

≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit

the connection to this unit.

≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded

title to be edited.

≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 54, Setting the protection).
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while

copying.

≥Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system

currently selected in “TV System” (➡ 60).

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”

and press [OK].

e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]

HDD

FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

To Others

OK

RETURN

30:00 SP

Remain

G-Code Record

Advanced Copy

Playlists

Flexible Rec

DV Auto Rec

Setup

HDD Management

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”

and press [OK].

5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title

and press [4].

≥Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to

step 7.

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

Source Title

001

Source Chapter

001

Chapters in Playlist

OK

OPTION

RETURN

Create

002

002 003

---

Press RETURN to finish.

Page 001/001

------

Page 001/001

---

---------

Page 001/001

Playlists

HDD

6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you

want to add to a playlist and press
[OK].

Press [3] to cancel.

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

Source Title

001

Source Chapter

001

Chapters in Playlist

OK

OPTION

RETURN

Create

002

002 003

Press RETURN to finish.

Page 001/001

------

Page 001/001

---

------------

Page 001/001

Playlists

HDD

≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.

Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]
(➡ 37, Create Chapter).

7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to

insert the chapter and press [OK].

001 ARD 11.10. SAT

Source Title

001 002

Source Chapter

001

Chapters in Playlist

OK

RETURN

Create

002 003

Press RETURN to finish.

------

---

------------

Page 001/001

Page 001/001

Page 001/001

Playlists

HDD

≥Press [3] to select other source titles.
≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.

8 Press [RETURN].

All the selected scenes become the playlist.

RQT9075

38

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Editing and playing playlists/chapters

01

Create

- -- -

- -- -- -

12.10. SUN 0:30

HDD

Playlists Playlist View

Playlists Chapter View

01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30

001

--- ---

--- ------ ---

002

HDD

0:19.36

0:10.24

[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”

and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and

press [OK].

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

playlist.

To start play ➡ Press [OK].
To edit ➡ Step 5.

Playlist View screen

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 36)

5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and

press [OK].

Create

Copy

Delete

Properties

Edit

Chapter View

Enter Name

Change Thumbnail

∫ If you select “Chapter View”

Refer to “Playlist
operations”.

6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

chapter.

To start play ➡ Press [OK].
To edit ➡ Step 7.

Chapter View screen

≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (➡ 36)

7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select

the operation and press [OK].

Add Chapter

Move Chapter

Create Chapter

Combine Chapters

Delete Chapter

Playlist View

≥You can go back to Playlist View.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Refer to “Chapter
operations”.

Playlist operations

After performing steps 1–5 (➡ left)

Delete

[HDD] [RAM]

§

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and
cannot be restored.

Make certain before proceeding.

Properties

[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]

Create

Playlist information (e.g., total time and
date) is shown.
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.

Properties

Dinosaur

No.

Date
Tota l10002

OK

12.10.2006 TUE

RETURN

Chapters 0:30.53

(➡ 38, Creating playlists, Step 5–8)

[HDD] [RAM]

§

Copy

[HDD] [RAM]

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].

≥The copied playlist becomes the newest

one in the playlist view screen.

Enter Name

[HDD] [RAM]

Change

You can give names to playlists.
(➡ 42, Entering text)

(➡ 37, Change Thumbnail)

Thumbnail

[HDD] [RAM]

§

Multiple editing is possible.

Chapter operations

[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (➡ left)
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and

source chapters.

Add Chapter

Move
Chapter

Create

(➡ 38, Creating playlists, Step 5–7)

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
position to insert the chapter and
press [OK].

Playlists Move Chapter

HDD

01 12.10. SUN 0:11

001

002

--- ---

0:19.36

0:10.240:10.24

Previous Page 01/01 Next

OK

RETURN

--- ------ ---

--- ------ ---

(➡ 37, Create Chapter)

Chapter

Combine

(➡ 37, Combine Chapters)

Chapters

Delete
Chapter

§

Multiple editing is possible.

§

(➡ 37, Delete Chapter)
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete
all the chapters in it.

Creating, editing and playing playlists

RQT9075

39

Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are

Properties

Change Date

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Album View

Delete Picture

c

applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

≥You can edit pictures and albums.
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on CD-R/CD-RW and USB

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 54, Setting the protection).

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

2 Editing an album:

3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

∫ To edit the album

∫ To edit still picture

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

RQT9075

40

Editing still pictures and music

Editing still pictures (JPEG)

memory.

[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

Select the album to be edited and
press [OPTION].

≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,

press [OPTION] without selecting album.

Editing a still picture:

1 Select the album which contains the still

picture to edit and press [OK].

2 Select the still pictures to edit and press

[OPTION].

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

and press [OK].

(e.g., [HDD])

Start Slide Show

Slide Show Setting

Add Pictures

Create Album

Edit Album

Copy to DVD-RAM

VIDEO/MUSIC

(e.g., [HDD])

Useful functions during still picture
play (➡ 31)

Delete Album

Change Date

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Album (still picture) and picture operation
(➡ right)

Album (still picture) and picture
operation (➡ right)

You can go back to Album View.

Album (still picture) and picture
operation

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)

Delete
Picture

§

Delete
Album

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

§

Change

§

Date

[HDD] [RAM]

Enter Album
Name

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

Set up
Protection
Cancel
Protection

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
and press [OK].

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are

lost and cannot be restored. Make

certain before proceeding.

≥When deleting an album, files other than

the still picture files inside the album will
also be deleted. (This does not apply to
folders under the album concerned.)

You can change the date of the picture.

1 Press [2, 1] to select the item

and press [3, 4] to change.

2 Press [OK].

You can give names to albums.
(➡ 42, Entering text)
≥Album names input using this unit may not

be displayed on other equipment.

If set, this will
protect the still

§

picture or album
from accidental
deletion.

§

Press [2, 1]

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Pi

HDD

Album Name

0001

to select “Yes”

103__

0002

and press [OK].

The lock symbol appears when the still
picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this

unit to protect an album, the album may be
deleted by another unit.

Properties

[HDD] [RAM] [CD]
[USB] [SD]

Copy to
DVD-RAM

[HDD]

Information (e.g., image size and file size) is
shown.
≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

Press [2, 1] to select “Start”
and press [OK].

You cannot copy if multiple albums are
selected.

Copy to
HDD

[RAM]

Add
Pictures
Create
Album

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

§

Multiple editing is possible.
[Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed]

[Note]

≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change Date”,

“Copy to DVD-RAM”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create
Album”.

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start”

or “Yes” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select

the album that contains the
still picture you want to add
and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item

and press [OK].

≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:

Select the still picture you want to add
and press [OK].

≥If “Copy all pictures” is selected:

All the still pictures in the album will be
copied.

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”

or “No” and press [OK].

≥If you want to continue copying, select

“Yes” and go to step ➁.

Only for “Create Album”

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”

or “No” and press [OK].

≥If “Yes” is selected:

You can give names to albums. (➡ 42,
Entering text)

≥If “No” is selected:

The album name is automatically given.

Editing music

[HDD]

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play CD on

HDD” or “Play MP3 on HDD” and
press [OK].

3 Editing an album/group

Press [3, 4] to select the album/
group and press [OPTION].

Editing a track

1 Press [3, 4] to select the album/group and

press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and press

[OPTION].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation

and press [OK].

∫ To edit the album (CD)/group (MP3)

e.g., Album View (CD)

Delete Album

Enter Album Name

Repeat Play Setting

Track View

Sort

VIDEO/PICTURE

➡ below

∫ To edit the track (CD/MP3)

e.g., Track View (MP3)

Delete Track

Properties

Enter Track Name

Enter Artist Name

Repeat Play Setting

Group View

Useful functions during music play (➡ 32)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/MP3)
operation (➡ below)

Useful functions during music play (➡ 32)

≥Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to

play—Direct Navigator (➡ 27)

≥Playing still pictures (➡ 30)

Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/MP3)
operation (➡ below)

You can go back to Album View (CD)/Group
View (MP3)

Deleting still pictures and music using
DELETE Navigator

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

3 [HDD] [RAM]

Press the colour button to select
“PICTURE” or “MUSIC”.

[HDD] If you pressed the “Yellow” button, press [3, 4] to
select “Delete CD on HDD” or “Delete MP3 on HDD” and
press [OK].

4 Deleting an album (still picture), album (CD) or group

(MP3)

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
and press [DELETE ¢].

Deleting a still picture or track (MP3)

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or

group which contains the still picture or
track to delete and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still

picture or track and press [OK].

You can confirm the item that you have selected using the
option menu.
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View” (➡ 40,

step 3).

≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG)

View” (➡ 40, step 3).

≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View (CD)”

(➡ left, step 4).

≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Track View (MP3)”

(➡ left, step 4).

To show other pages [Album (still picture) and still
picture only]

Press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple deleting [Album (still picture) and still picture
only]

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and

press [OK].

The item is deleted.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Editing still pictures and music

Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/
MP3) operation

After performing step 1-4 (➡ above)

Delete Album (CD)
Delete Group (MP3)
Delete Track (MP3)

Enter Album Name (CD)
Enter Group Name
(MP3)
Enter Track Name (CD/
MP3)

Enter Artist Name (CD/
MP3)

[Note]

≥Timer recordings do not start while editing music.

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”
and press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded

contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before

proceeding.

You can give names to albums/groups
and tracks.
(➡ 42, Entering text)

You can edit the artist name of the
track.
(➡ 42, Entering text)

[Note]

You cannot delete a track (CD) individually.

RQT9075

41

Entering text

5

JKL

_

Enter Name

12345

ABC a

DEF d

GH I g

678 90
bcKL
ef/N %
hi $

*

&

Top Menu Preview

1

2

3

4

Chapter 1_

Chapter 1

Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
[SD]

You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:

[HDD] [RAM] Characters

Title

64 (44

§

)

Playlist 64

Album of still pictures 36
Album (CD) ([HDD])40
Group (MP3) ([HDD])40
Track (CD/MP3) ([HDD])40
Artist (CD/MP3) ([HDD])40
Disc ([RAM])64

§

Title name for timer recording

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Characters

Title 44

Disc 40

[SD] Characters

Album of still pictures 36

[Note]

If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a

3 Press [∫] (Set).

To end partway

Press [RETURN].
Text is not added.

For your reference

If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalisation (➡ 56). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”
window.

character and press [OK].

Repeat this step to enter other characters.

≥To delete a character

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)

≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters

e.g., entering the letter “R”

1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.
3 Press [OK].

≥To enter a space

Press [DELETE ¢] and press

7

[OK].

“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view
screen and so on.

77

M

6

7

8

NO

PQR

TUV

1 Show Enter Name screen.

Title (timer recording)

Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 24.

Title

Select “Enter Name” in step 4 on page 36.

Playlist

Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 39.

Disc

Select “Disc Name” in step 1 of “Providing a name for a
disc” on page 54.

Album (CD) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 41.

Group (MP3) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Group Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 41.

Track (CD/MP3) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Track Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 41.

Artist (CD/MP3) ([HDD])

Select “Enter Artist Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on
page 41.

Album of still pictures

Select “Enter Album Name” in step 3, “Editing still pictures
(JPEG)” on page 40.

Name field: shows the text you have entered

Enter Name

_

Top Menu Preview

Delete



Set

v

LL

0

SELECT

OK

9

RETURN

1

12345

2

ABC a

3

DEF d

4

GH INOg

5

JKL j

M

6

PQRSp

7

TUV t

8

WXY Z w

9

.

,

!?

0

678 90

bcKL

ef/N %

hi $

kl10@

m

o[

n ]

q rs( )

uv{ }

xyz

:

"

'

Space

*

&

_

-

|

\

^

;

`

RQT9075

42

Copying titles or playlists

Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.

Copy Advanced Copy

Features Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult

settings.

Copy direction HDD ➝ DVD ≤≤

DVD ➝ HDD – ≤

High speed mode copy

§1

≤≤

Changing recording mode –
Finalise

§3

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Automatically finalised

High speed mode Normal speed mode High speed mode Normal speed mode

Copying SD Video from an SD card

––≤

([EH68]) (➡ 47)
Copying playlists

§4

Are chapters maintained? ≤
Are thumbnails maintained? ≤
Recording and Playing while Copying

§1

To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The default setting is “On”.

––≤≤

§5

–

§6

–

––

However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.

≥

When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with high-speed copy.

≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.
≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments.
≥[EH68] SD Video titles copied to the HDD from an SD card.

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed )

§2

If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

§3

You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (

§4

You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.

§5

[RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.

§6

Thumbnails return to the default position.

§7

When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.

§8

Possible only with titles on the HDD
[However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation or when copying SD Video from an SD card ([EH68]).]

– You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
– You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (➡ 20).
– Still pictures cannot be played.

∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)

(excludes time required to write data management information)

HDD

Recording

Recorded

Mode

XP 1 hour 12 min. 5x
SP 6 min. 10x

LP 3 min. 20x
EP (6H) 2 min. 30x 58 s. 62x
EP (8H)

≥The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed

recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.

§1

In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.

§2

In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.

§3

In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.

§4

In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.

[Note]

≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.

Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer)
and +R DL (single-sided, Double Layer)

When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed
to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to
the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.

– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When

copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP
mode is needed on the HDD.)
When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to be

–

copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 499 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (➡ 11)

Required

1

5X Speed

DVD-RAM

time

1 min. 30 s.

Speed

12X Speed

Required

DVD-R

§1

Speed

time

5 min. 46 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 21 s.

10x 15 min. 4x 15 min. 4x
24x
44x

40x 48 s. 75x

4X Speed

DVD-R DL

Required

time

7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 53 s.

§2

Speed

8x
16x
24x
32x

4X Speed

DVD-RW

Required

time

7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.
2 min. 30 s.
1 min. 57 s.

Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One time
only recording”

You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (➡ 78) compatible
DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.

≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➡ 37).
≥You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording”

titles.

≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered

on the same copying list.

Make a copy list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the
way you want.

[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)

You cannot perform high-speed copy with finalised discs.

[DVD-V]
[+RW]

You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.

§2

≤

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Can be selected

[HDD] [RAM] only

≤

§7

≤

§8

≤

–
–

➡ 56

§3

Speed

8x

16x

8X Speed

+R

Required

time

8 min. 20 s.
3 min. 45 s.
1 min. 53 s.

§4

Speed

7x 15 min. 4x 15 min. 4x
16x
32x

4X Speed

+R DL

Required

time

7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.

§2

Speed

8x

16x

Required

24x
31x

–

§5

§6

–

➡ 58

).

).

4X Speed

+RW

time

7 min. 30 s.
3 min. 45 s.

Entering text/Copying titles or playlists

Speed

8x

16x

RQT9075

43

Copying titles or playlists

Before copying

When copying a title with main and secondary audio

≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from

“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 59) when:
– Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R, +R DL and +RW.

– When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (➡ 59)

and you are copying in XP mode.

∫ Speed and recording mode when copying

[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following

table.

Rec for High Speed Copy (➡ 58) Copy speed

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”.

§

Only titles recorded with “Rec for High

High speed

Normal speed

Speed Copy” set to “Off”.

When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.

§

In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”

or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for

Recording” do not match.

≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:

– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR

(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

[Note]

Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL
or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot
be copied.

Preparation

≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (➡ 11).
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.

Copy

DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
are automatically finalised (➡ 78). After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.
(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,
copy will not be performed.)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

COPY Navigator

HDD

Rec time
0:52(SP)

OK

RETURN

OPTION

Total : 0

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008

---

Disc Space: 4310MBAll Titles

Total Size: 0MB( 0%)

ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00

Page 01/01

Select

Name of titleTimeNo. Name Date Day

3 Press [3, 4] to select the title you

want to copy and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.

To show other pages

Press [:, 9] to show other pages.

5 After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play­only and you can no longer record or edit.

Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].

Copy starts.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

∫ To stop copying (➡ 45)
∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and

functions (➡ 46)

∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY

Navigator

1Press [3, 4] to select the title and press

[OPTION].

COPY Navigator

HDD

Rec time
0:52(SP)

OK

RETURN

2Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”

and press [OK].

Properties:

The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown.

Sort (All Titles screen only):
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].

This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is
cancelled.

[Note]

≥When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording

compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the
sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➡ 58).

≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title

at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (➡ 45).

Total : 0

001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008

Properties

Sort

Grouped Titles

OPTION

All Titles

ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05
AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10
ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25
ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30
ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00

---

Page 01/01

Disc Space: 4310MB

Total Size: 0MB( 0%)

Name of titleTimeNo. Name Date Day

RQT9075

44

4 Press [OK].

Copying using the copying list–
Advanced Copy

[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]

You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.

See also “Before copying” (➡ 44).

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”

and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced

Copy” and press [OK].

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

1

HDD DVD

Copy Mode

2

VIDEO High Speed

Create List

3

Start Copying

OK

RETURN

≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]

several times (➡ step 7).

0

Source

HDD

Destination

DVD

Select the copy direction.

4 Set the copy direction.

≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press

[4] (➡ step 5).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].

If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to
“DVD”, or vice versa. (➡ Go to step 6)

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].

The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.

6 Press [2] to confirm.

5 Set the recording mode.

≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press

[4] (➡ step 6).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].
6 Press [2] to confirm.

6 Register titles and playlists for copy.

≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (➡ step 7).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

1

HDD DVD

Copy Mode

2

VIDEO High Speed

Create List

3

Start Copying

OK

RETURN

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the

“Green” button to select “Playlists”.

Create List All Titles

HDD

007

ARD 10.10. FRI

Previous Page 02/02 Next

OK

RETURN

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press

[;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.

OPTION

OPTION

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Size: 0MB

Name of item

No. Size

New item (Total=0)

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

VIDEO

- - -

008 0:30(XP)

ARD 11.10. SAT

- - -- - -- - -

Select

Previous

( 0%)

Playlists

Next

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.

≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,

the check mark is cancelled.

≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “ ” or

“ ” can be registered.
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “ ” can be

registered.

≥To show other pages (➡ below)

5 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (➡ 46)

You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (➡ 46)
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient).

6 Press [2] to confirm.

7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or
+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than
normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (➡ 58).

8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or
“Copy Only” and press [OK].

≥If “Copy & Finalise” is selected

After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

∫ To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)

When High-speed copying

All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.

When Normal Speed copying

Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time
only recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied
at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are
cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain
on the HDD.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while

temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.
However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to
disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the
point canceled are copied.

Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of
remaining writable disc space becomes less.

∫ To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

∫ Recording and playing while copying

You can record and play using the HDD while high speed
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)
≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.

Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.

≥To confirm the current progress

Press [STATUS].

[Note]

≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the

HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)

Copying titles or playlists

RQT9075

45

Copying titles or playlists

COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions

COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators

Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW

Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)

[+R]DL] is displayed, but copy cannot be
performed.

Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➡ 20, When recording the “One time only
recording” broadcasts)

Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying. (➡ 20, When
recording the “One time only recording”
broadcasts)

Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.

(NTSC)
(PAL)

Data size of each registered item

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

Create copy list.

To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6–5 (➡ 45)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press

[OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list.
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Move:

Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying setting and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 45)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the

copy source

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
system from that of the TV system currently
selected on the unit.
≥Titles and playlists displaying these marks

cannot be selected.

Size:

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

destination
≥When copying at normal speed, the

Data size recorded to the copy

(0%)

Size: 0MB

total data size will change according to

Page 01/01

the recording mode.

≥The total data size shown may be

larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.

Delete All

Add

Delete

Move

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL

[DVD-V] > [HDD]

You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that

portion of title is not recorded.

≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (➡ 58) is set to “On” and you

make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ 58) of the Setup menu.

≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also

recorded.

≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent

illegal copying, and cannot be copied.

≥The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.

Preparation

≥Insert the finalised disc (➡ 15).

After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD­Video”) (➡

45, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)

1 Set “Copy Time”.

≥If you are not going to change the setting (➡ step 2).

∫ Setting the unit to copy according to the set time

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].

≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.

Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.

≥Setting the copying time

3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

1

DVD HDD

Copy Mode

2

DVD-Video XP

Copy Time

3

Start Copying

OK

RETURN

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press

[3, 4] to set the recording time.

6 Press [OK].
7 Press [2] to confirm.

Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after
the content being played finishes.

≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to

include the operation time before play begins.

≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered

buttons.

Hour002

Min.

Set the time a few minutes
longer.

Press OK to change the setting.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is

selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (➡ 56).

RQT9075

46

3 When the top menu is displayed

My favorite 01/02

01
Chapter 1

03

05

02

04

06

Chapter 2

Chapter 3 Chapter 4

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[OK].

While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To stop copying

Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.

[Note]

≥The screen on the right is recorded at the

beginning.

≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start

of copy to the end.

≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top

menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to star t.

≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original

picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.

≥If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video

Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (➡ 45, Copying
using the copying list–Advanced Copy).

Copying SD Video from an SD card

[EH68]

Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc,
can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card with this unit.

You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.

≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
≥This unit cannot copy AVCHD format motion pictures from an SD

card.

SD Video

VIDEO

§

Copying SD Video from a video
equipment [EH68]

Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be
copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this unit.

You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.

≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.

SD Video

§

DVD Video Recording format

Preparation

1 Turn on both this unit and the camera.
2 Connect the camera to this unit.
3 Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for

data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.

≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.

The display below automatically appears when you connect the
camera to this unit.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press [OK].
Then go to step 7 on page 45.

USB device

Play Video (DivX)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3)

Copy Music (MP3)

Update CD database on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

OK

≥SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the

copy list.

≥If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video (MPEG2)”

is not displayed.

VIDEO

§

OPEN/CLOSE

REC

HDD

DVD-RAM

Copying titles or playlists

HDD

DVD-RAM

§

DVD Video Recording format

The display below automatically appears when you insert a card
into the SD card slot while stopped.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press [OK].
Then go to step 7 on page 45.

SD Card

Copy Video (MPEG2)
Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

SELECT

RETURN

OK

How to copy

Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy” (➡ 45)
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.

Copy Direction:

Source:SD CARD
Copy Mode:

Format:VIDEO

≥SD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the

copy list.

≥If there are no SD Video on an SD card, “Copy Video (MPEG2)”

is not displayed.

RQT9075

47

Copying still pictures

Copy All Pictures

Copy from

USB

Copy to

HDD

Copy New Pictures

Copy from

SD CARD

Copy to

HDD

Copy

SD CARD

HDD

1

2

3

Source

Destination

Cancel All

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Create List

SD CARD HDD

PICTURE

High Speed

0

Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable
to the DMR-EH68 model only

[HDD] [RAM] [USB] [SD]
≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be

used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment.
SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only
compatible with SD Memory Cards.

≥You cannot copy pictures recorded to CD-R/CD-RW.
≥Still pictures copied from USB memories or SD cards are grouped

by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

Copying all the still pictures on the USB
memory—Copy All Pictures

[USB] > [HDD] or [RAM]

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory (➡ 15).

The menu is automatically displayed.

USB device

Play Video (DivX)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3)

Copy Music (MP3)

Update CD database on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

OK

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures

(JPEG)” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures

(JPEG)” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and

press [2, 1] to select the drive.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”

and press [OK].

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

[Note]

≥This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and 30

SD cards. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older
information will be deleted.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 14), copying will
stop partway through.

≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

Copying using the copying list

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and

press [2, 1] to select the drive.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”

and press [OK].

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

[Note]

≥The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same

at the copy destination.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 14), copying will
stop partway through.

≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

Copying new still pictures on the SD
card—Copy New Pictures [EH68]

[SD] > [HDD] or [RAM]
This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if
still pictures are imported from the same SD card, then only new still
pictures will be imported.

1 While stopped

Insert the SD card. (➡ 15).

The menu is automatically displayed.

SD Card

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”

and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced

Copy” and press [OK].

≥If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]

several times (➡ step 7).

4 Set the copy direction.

≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press

[4] (➡ step 5).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].

The same drive as the copy source can be selected.

6 Press [2] to confirm.

5 Set the copy mode.

≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press

[4] (➡ step 6).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].

“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.

4 Press [2] to confirm.

RQT9075

48

SELECT

RETURN

OK

6 Register still pictures for copy.

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

1

Cancel All

Picture

Copy Direction

Picture/Folder

SD CARD HDD

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

Folder

New folder

001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD

---

-

New folder

≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (➡ step 7).

You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same

list.

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

1

SD CARD HDD

Copy Mode

2

PICTURE

Create List

3

Start Copying

OK

RETURN

High Speed

OPTION

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Picture/Folder

No. Size

New item (Total=0)

Create copy list.

Page 01/01

Picture

Name of item

∫ To register individual still pictures

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press

[;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.

≥To show other pages (➡ right)
≥To select another folder (➡ right)

4 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (➡ right)

5 Press [2] to confirm.

∫ To register on a folder by folder basis

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.

≥To show other pages (➡ right)

6 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (➡ right)

7 Press [2] to confirm.

7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

≥Only when copying individual still pictures from [HDD] [RAM]

to [SD]
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.

--

8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

[Note]

≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy

list may not be the same at the copy destination.

≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination

folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still
pictures.

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/

folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 14), copying will
stop partway through.

≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

To show other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].

≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6–4 (for a still picture) or 6–6
(for a folder) (➡ left)

1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press

[OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list.
1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder and press

[;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 48, Copying using the copying list)
1Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
2Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

– When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the

copy source

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

Delete All

Add

Delete

∫ To select another folder

After performing steps 6–2 (➡ left, To register individual still
pictures)

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].

Create List Picture (JPEG)

SD CARDSD CARD SD CARD

Folder 103__DVD

0002

0001

----

----

OK

RETURN

Previous

0003

----

---- ---- ----

Page

001/001

0004

--------

Next

You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,

5:

[0] ➡ [0] ➡ [5]

15:

[0] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

115:

[1] ➡ [1] ➡ [5]

≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the

same list.

Create List

OK

RETURN

\DCIM\100__DVD
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD

---

---

---

---

Folder

Page 01/01

Picture 0012 File 0012

Copying still pictures

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

RQT9075

49

Copying music to HDD

You can store the two formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.

Music CD (CD-DA)

When copying music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal
Gracenote

®

Database to obtain title information. The album name,
track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you
find the track easily when playing back.

MP3

You can copy MP3 files from the USB memory.

About the Gracenote® Database

®

The Gracenote

Database is a database used to search and retrieve
CD title information.
When a CD is inserted or recording from a CD begins, the unit will
automatically search for and obtain information about the inserted
CD.
The Gracenote

®

Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles
and artist information can be obtained. Please note however that the
newest CD titles, etc. may not be registered yet to the internal
database. This unit has an internal database containing information
for approximately 350,000 album titles.
You can update the internal database (➡ 51).

If there are CDs with very similar title information, then the incorrect
title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are found,
then track name, album name and artist name will be blank.
In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after
recording to the HDD has completed.

Copying music from a CD

[CD] > [HDD]
All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)

≥One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.
≥Audio quality: LPCM
≥The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300

(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that
can be recorded will be reduced.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

1 Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

CD

Play Music

Copy Music

SELECT

RETURN

OK

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”

and press [OK].

The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and
searches for the title information.

POWERED BY

[Note]

≥While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer

recordings will not proceed.

≥Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc, USB

memory or SD card.

≥CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)

restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.

Copying music from a USB memory

[USB] > [HDD]
You can copy MP3 files recorded on USB memory devices to the
HDD by file or folder.

≥One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.
≥The maximum number of groups on HDD: 300

The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of groups that
can be recorded will be reduced.

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory (➡ 15).

The menu is automatically displayed.

USB device

Play Video (DivX)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3)

Copy Music (MP3)

Update CD database on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

OK

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music

(MP3)” and press [OK].

“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to
“USB#HDD” and “MUSIC High Speed”, respectively.

3 Register MP3 files for copy.

≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (➡ step 4).

You can register MP3 files or MP3 file folders.
≥MP3 files and folders cannot be registered on the same list.

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

1

USB HDD

Copy Mode

2

MUSIC

High Speed

Create List

3

Start Copying

OK

RETURN

∫ To register individual MP3 files

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.

5 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (➡ 51)

6 Press [2] to confirm.

OPTION

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Track/Folder

No. Size

New item (Total = 0)

Create copy list.

Page 01/01

Trac k

Name of item

RQT9075

50

If search results indicate that multiple titles were found

Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and

press [OK].

Recording starts.

To stop recording

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
≥If the recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be

recorded.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

∫ To register on a folder by folder basis

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

1

Cancel All

Trac k

Copy Direction

Track/Folder

USB HDD

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Track/Folder” and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.

6 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (➡ below)

7 Press [2] to confirm.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start

Copying” and press [OK].

≥For individual files only

When specifying an existing folder as the copying
destination

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].

When creating a new folder as the copying destination

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
2 Enter the folder name (➡ 42, Entering text).

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK] to start copying.

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

[Note]

≥The sequence in which the MP3 files are registered on the copy list

may not be the same at the copy destination.

≥If MP3 files are already contained inside the copy destination

folder, the new MP3 files are recorded following the existing MP3
files.

∫ To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 3–5 (for a MP3 file) (➡ 50,
Copying music from a USB memory) or 3–6 (for a
folder) (➡ above).

1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press

[OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file or folder and press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps 1–2 (➡ 50, Copying music from a USB
memory)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.

– When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy
direction, etc.

Delete All

Add

Delete

To update the Gracenote® Database

To update the database with information on CDs that were recently
released, follow the instructions below.

∫ Preparing the update data

1 Visit the following website.

http://panasonic.net/pavc/support/gn/

2 Download the data to your USB memory.

≥USB memory 1 GB or larger is required.
≥Refer to the instruction on the website for more information.

∫ Updating the database on this unit

3 Turn on this unit.
4 Insert the USB memory (➡ 15).

The menu is automatically displayed.

USB device

Play Video (DivX)

Play Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Pictures (JPEG)

Play Music (MP3)

Copy Music (MP3)

Update CD database on HDD

SELECT

RETURN

OK

5Press [3, 4] to select “Update CD database on HDD” and press

[OK].

6Press [2, 1] to select “Update” and press [OK].

≥Updating takes up to 20 minutes.
≥Do not disconnect the USB memory and the AC mains lead

while updating.

≥Once started, you cannot cancel updating.

A message appears when updating is finished.

7 Press [OK].

[Note]

≥Timer recordings do not start while updating.
≥Updating overwrites the internal database forcibly regardless of

whether the data in the USB memory is the latest or not. Make
sure you download the latest version from the website.

≥Some of the CD title information in the database may be deleted

after updating the database.

≥No name will be assigned after copying a CD to HDD if the CD title

information of the CD is not registered in the database. Even if the
CD title information of that CD is added to the database by
updating later, the information will not be assigned to the track/
album already copied on the HDD. (The names will be still blank.)

≥Depending on the situation of Panasonic or Gracenote, upgrading

the Gracenote
discontinued without notice.

®

Database and providing it through the Web may be

Copying music to HDD

[Note]

≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of

files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (➡ 14), copying
will stop partway through.

RQT9075

51

Using on-screen menus/Status message

Using on-screen menus

Common procedures

1 Press [DISPLAY].

Disc

Play
Picture
Sound
Other

Menu Item Setting

≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,

etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.

Soundtrack

Subtitle

Audio channel

1

§Digital 2/0 ch

Off

L R

2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and

press [1].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and

press [1].

4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.

≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].

To clear the on-screen menus

Press [DISPLAY].

Disc menu—Setting the disc content

Soundtrack

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.

[DVD-V]

Select the audio and language (➡ below, Audio attribute,
Language).

DivX

Select the soundtrack number.
≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only

one audio type.

Subtitle

[DVD-V]

Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➡ below,
Language).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.

DivX

Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
≥Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple

subtitles.

Angle

Change the number to select an angle.

Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX

(➡ 26, Changing audio during play)

Source Select (DivX)

≥Automatic:

≥Interlace:

≥Progressive:

PBC (Playback control ➡ 78) [VCD]

Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.

§

With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using
the menus (➡ 16) on the disc.

≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot

change when there is no recording.

Audio attribute

LPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):

Language

ENG:
FRA:
DEU:
ITA:
ESP:
NLD:
SVE:
NOR:

§

§

§

[DVD-V]

The constructing method of the DivX contents is
automatically distinguished and output.

Select when the disc contents were recorded using
interlace.

Select when the disc contents were recorded using
progressive.

Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels

English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
Swedish
Norwegian

DAN:
POR:
RUS:
JPN:
CHI:
KOR:
MAL:
VIE:

Danish
Portuguese
Russian
Japanese
Chinese
Korean
Malay
Vietnamese

THA:
POL:
CES:
SLK:
HUN:
FIN:
¢:

Thai
Polish
Czech
Slovak
Hungarian
Finnish
Others

RQT9075

52

Play menu—Change the play sequence

This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.

Repeat Play

≥All
≥Chapter

[CD] [VCD]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]

≥Group
≥PL (Playlist)
≥Title

MP3 (except [USB])
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]

≥Tr a c k

[CD] [VCD] and MP3 (except [USB])

Select “Off” to cancel.

Picture menu—Change the picture quality

Playback NR

Reduces noise and picture degradation.

§

Progressive

Select “On” to enable progressive output.
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.

Transfer

Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (➡ 78, Film and video).

When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)

≥Auto:

≥Video:

≥Film:

When the output signal is NTSC

≥Auto1

≥Auto2:

≥Video:

Input NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV is selected)

Reduces video tape noise while copying.

≥Automatic:

≥On:

≥Off:

§

Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu
(➡ 60).

(➡ 78)

§

[When “Progressive” (➡ above) is set to “On”.]

Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges of
the film content appear
jagged or rough when
“Auto” is selected.
However, if the video
content is distorted as
shown in the illustration
to the right, then select “Auto”.

Automatically detects the film and video

(normal):

content, and appropriately converts it.
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and
the content is distorted.

Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video tape.

Noise reduction works for input video.

Noise reduction is off. You can record the input signal as it is.

Sound menu—Change the sound effect

V.S.S.

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)

Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers
only.
≥Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround

function on the connected equipment.)

≥V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.

Dialog Enhancer

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
and DivX
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)

The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.

Other menu—Change the display position

Position

1–5:
The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu moves.

Status messages

Press [STATUS].

The display changes each time you press the button.

HDD

REC

PLAY

STEREO

L R

DVD REC

Title number and elapsed time during play/
Recording mode

Date and time

18:53:50 11.10.
v T1 0:05.14 XP v T2 0:00.10 XP

≥When using Pause Live TV

The time when the picture currently displayed on the
television was broadcasted

Play 15:05:13

Selected drive status/type of disc or USB memory
The remaining time appears here while stopped.

Recording or play status/input channel

TV audio type being received (➡ below)
Selected audio type

Recording drive/Copy progress indicator

Available recording time and
recording mode

v

Remain

13:50 XP

Title number and elapsed time during recording/
Recording mode

Live 15:10:46

Current time

Using on-screen menus/Status message

No display

≥TV audio type
STEREO: STEREO stereo broadcast
M1/M2: Bilingual dual-sound broadcast
M1: Monaural broadcast

RQT9075

53

HDD, disc and card management

My favorite 01/02

01
Chapter 1

02

Chapter 2

(

Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[SD]

Common procedures

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”

and press [OK].

e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]

HDD

FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

To Others

OK

RETURN

30:00 SP

Remain

G-Code Record

Advanced Copy

Playlists

Flexible Rec

DV Auto Rec

Setup

HDD Management

Setting the protection

[RAM]

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc

Protection” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

DVD
Management

DVD-RAM

SELECT

OK

The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write­protected.

RETURN

Titles 11
Used

0 : 22

Disc Name

Disc Protection

Delete all titles

Format Disc

Remain

5:38 (EP)

On

3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD

Management”, “DVD Management” or
“Card Management” and press [OK].

e.g., [RAM]

DVD
Management

DVD-RAM

SELECT

OK

≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and

“Format HDD” are displayed.

≥When SD has been selected, “Format Card” only is

displayed.

RETURN

Titles 11
Used

0 : 22

Disc Name

Disc Protection

Delete all titles

Format Disc

Remain

5:38 (EP)

Off

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Cartridge-protection

For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge

≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,

play automatically starts when inserted in the
unit.

PROTECT

[SD]

Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.

LOCK

Providing a name for a disc

[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can provide a name for each disc.

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ above, Setting the protection).

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ left)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”

and press [OK].

(➡ 42, Entering text)

RQT9075

54

≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is

displayed on the Top Menu.

≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other

equipment after creating top menu.

DVD
Management

DVD-RAM

Documentary

Titles 11
Used

0 : 22

Remain

5:38

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete
all titles

[HDD] [RAM]

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (➡ 54, Setting the protection).

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 54, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all

titles” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when finished.

4 Press [OK].

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

[Note]

≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be

restored. Make certain before proceeding.

≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still picture data (JPEG), music data or computer data cannot be

deleted.

≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.

Deleting all the contents—Format

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
[SD]

Preparation

≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.
≥[RAM] [SD] Release protection (➡ 54, Setting the protection).

[Note]

Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or

card even if you have set protection.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 54, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”,

“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and
press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when formatting is finished.

[Note]

≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may

take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.

This can render the disc or the card unusable.

4 Press [OK].

[Note]

≥When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not

be possible to use it on any other equipment.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.

HDD, disc and card management

To stop formatting [RAM]

Press [RETURN].
≥You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc

must be reformatted if you do this.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

RQT9075

55

HDD, disc and card management

Selecting the background style–Top
Menu

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD­Video top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu ([+RW]).

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 54, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”

and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

background and press [OK].

Top Menu List

1

2

3

Display after finalising

Thumbnail
(Still picture)

≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (➡ 37,

Change Thumbnail)

4

7 8

Title Name

5

6

01

9

After finalising
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you

can no longer record or edit.

≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting

(➡ 55) although it becomes play-only after finalising.

≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8-

≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and

Recording/Editing/Entering name ≤ –

Play on other players – ≤

≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s

equipment.

≥If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than

this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.

≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players

due to the condition of the recording.

§

minute)
– the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
– the titles were copied using any mode other than the high

§

chapters during play.

chapters, if

speed mode (excluding [-R]DL] [+R]DL]).
This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.

Before

finalising

After

finalising

RQT9075

56

Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first–Auto-Play Select

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 54, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play

Select” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or

“Title 1” and press [OK].

Top Menu: The top menu appears first.
Title 1: The disc content is played without displaying the

top menu.

Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment–Finalise

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ above)
before finalising the disc.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 54, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and

press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

A message appears when finalising is finished.

[Note]

≥You cannot cancel finalising.
≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.

([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)

≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.

This will render the disc unusable.

4 Press [OK].

[Note]

When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four
times).

Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu

[+RW]

+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.

You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.

Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (➡ left)
before creating top menu.

Preparation

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

After performing steps 1–3 (➡ 54, Common procedures)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top

Menu” and press [OK].

2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and

press [OK].

Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.

4 Press [OK].

[Note]

≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the

created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Changing the unit’s settings

You can change the unit’s settings using the Setup menu.
≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.

Common procedures

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”

and press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and

press [OK].

Tab s

Setup

Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound

Display
Connection

Others

Menus Options

Comb Filter
Still Mode
Seamless Play

SELECT

OK

TAB

RETURN

On

Automatic

On

4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and

press [1].

5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and

press [OK].

6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and

press [OK].

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Tuning

Manual Tuning

You can add or delete channels, or change programme positions.

Setup

Tun in g
Disc
Picture
Sound

Display
Connection
Others

To delete a programme position

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Red” button.

To add a blank programme position

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Green” button.

To move a TV station to another programme position

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press

the “Yellow” button.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the new programme position to

which you want to assign the TV station and press [OK].

[Note]

≥When the unit sets itself automatically with VIERA Link function

(➡ 10), only deletion of the programme position can be performed.

Manual Tuning
Auto-Setup Restart
Download from TV

SELECT

OK

Manual Tuning

Pos

Name

Pos

Name

TAB

RETURN

SELECT

OK

RETURN

Delete

Move

Add

Ch

1 ARD 4

2

2 ZDF

5

3 N3

8

4 HR3
5 BR3 10
6
7

8

9

10

Ch

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

To change the tuning settings for individual programme
position

e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]

SELECT

Delete

OK

Move

Add

Manual Tuning

Pos

Name

1 ARD 4
2 ZDF
3 N3
4 HR3
5 BR3 10
6
7

8

RETURN

9

10

Ch

2

5

8

Pos

Name

Ch

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Manual
Tun in g

SELECT

RETURN

RETURN : leave

Pos
Name
Channel
Fine Tuning
Mono

ARD

Auto

1

4

Off

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and

press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].

Pos To change the programme position in which

the TV stations are assigned

Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to select the
number of the desired programme position and
press [OK].

Name To enter or change the name of a TV station

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and
press [OK].
If the station name needs a blank space, select
the blank between “Z” and “¢”.

Channel To enter newly available TV stations or

change the channel number of an already
tuned TV station

Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter
the channel number of the desired TV station.
Wait a few moments until the desired TV station
has been tuned.
After the desired TV station is tuned, press
[OK].

Fine Tuning To obtain the best tuning condition

Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition
and press [OK].
≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.

Video
System

To select the video system type

§

Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the
picture lacks colour, and press [OK].
≥Auto

This unit automatically distinguishes PAL and
SECAM signals.

≥PA L

For receiving PAL signals.

≥SECAM

For receiving SECAM signals.
This setting is also available when you select
the external input channel (AV1, AV2, AV3,
AV4) in step 1 (➡ above).
In order to record properly, make the
appropriate settings to match the connected
equipment.

Audio
Mode

§

To select the audio reception type

If sound quality is poor, press [3, 4] to select
“BG”, “I” or “DK” and press [OK].
≥BG

PAL B . G .
≥I

PAL I
≥DK

PAL D.K.K1

Mono To select the type of sound to be recorded

Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound
is distorted due to inferior reception conditions,
or if you want to record the normal (mono)
sound during a stereo, bilingual or NICAM
broadcast, and press [OK].

§

Only for Asia and Middle East

HDD, disc and card management/Changing the unit’s settings

RQT9075

57

Changing the unit’s settings

Auto-Setup Restart
Download from TV

You can restart auto channel setting if set up (➡ 10) fails for some
reason.

Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a VIERA
Link (HDAVI Control 3) compatible TV with a HDMI cable.
(Programme positions are downloaded from the TV for the channels
in this unit’s channel coverage and copied through this convenient
function.)

When the confirmation screen appears

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

If the country setting menu appears on the television

2 Press [3, 4] to select the country and press

[OK].

You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
When the unit is on and stopped

Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
country setting screen

All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.

§

Only for Australia and N.Z.

§

or the Auto-Setup screen appears.

Disc

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Settings for Playback

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Ratings

Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password with
the numbered buttons when the password screen is shown.

Do not forget your password.

Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)

[8 No Limit

[1 to 7] Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding

[0 Lock All] Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)

[Unlock Recorder] [Change Password]

[Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]

Soundtrack

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish]

[Original] The original language of each disc will be

[Other ¢¢¢¢]

Subtitle

[Automatic] If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]

] All DVD-Video can be played.

ratings recorded on them.

selected.

§

available, subtitles of that language will
automatically appear if available on that disc.

§

Settings for Recording

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Recording time in EP mode

Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode
(➡ 21, Recording modes and approximate recording times).

[EP (6 Hours)] You can record for 6 hours on an unused

[EP (8 Hours)

≥The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than

when using “EP (8 Hours)”.

4.7 GB disc.

] You can record for 8 hours on an unused

4.7 GB disc.

Aspect for Recording

Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.

[Automatic

[16:9] [4:3]
≥When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec

for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded
in the original aspect ratio.

≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,

recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or

– When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.

] The programme will be recorded in the original

aspect used when recording started (including
when recording started at a commercial, etc.).

“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

Rec for High Speed Copy

You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using
high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is restricted
(➡ below).
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
This setting is effective when recording from a television
programme or external equipment (including DV equipment), or
when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.

] You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press

[On

[Off]

[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded

titles.
– Recordings are made using the aspect ratio

set in “Aspect for Recording” (➡ above).

– Select the type of audio in advance from

“Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ 59).

– You are no longer able to switch the audio

when watching a programme on an input
channel on the TV connected to this unit (e.g.,
AV1, etc).

DVD Speed for High Speed Copy

Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed
copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X
discs).

[Maximum

[Normal (Silent)] The noise generated by this unit is less

]

than when “Maximum” is selected,
however the time required for copying will
double (approximately).

RQT9075

58

Menus

[English] [German] [French] [Italian]

[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]

§

[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Enter a code (➡ 67) with the numbered buttons.
When the selected language is not available on the disc, the
default language is played. There are discs where you can only
switch the language from the menu screen (➡ 16).

[DVD-V]

Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you

make here.

§

Picture

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Comb Filter

Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC” (

[On] Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this

setting.

[Off] Select it when recording noisy pictures.

➡ 60

Still Mode

Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (➡ 78,
Frames and fields).

[Automatic

[Field] Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is

[Frame] Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be

]

selected. (The picture is coarser.)

seen clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The
picture is clearer and finer.)

Seamless Play

Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.

] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does

[On

not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAYa1.3).
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may
change slightly.

[Off] The points where chapters in playlists change are played

accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.

Sound

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Dynamic Range Compression

[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.

[On] [Off

Bilingual Audio Selection

Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:
≥Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.

≥“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.
≥Recording or copying sound in LPCM (➡ right, “Audio Mode for

XP Recording”).

][M2]

[M 1
≥You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an

external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.

≥When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of

audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (➡ right).

Digital Audio Output

Change the settings when you have connected equipment through
this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➡ 64).
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

PCM Down Conversion

Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the settings below if

the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the
disc has copy protection.

[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the

connected equipment cannot process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the

[Off

connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

Dolby Digital

Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2 channels.
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.

[Bitstream

[PCM] When connecting to equipment not displaying the

] When connecting to equipment displaying the

Dolby Digital logo.

Dolby Digital logo.

]

DTS

Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected
equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal
and outputs it as 2 channels.

).

≥Not making the proper settings may

result in noise.

[Bitstream

[PCM] When connecting to equipment not displaying the

] When connecting to equipment displaying the

DTS logo.

DTS logo.

MPEG

Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2
channels.
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.

[Bitstream] When connected to equipment with a built-in

[PCM

MPEG decoder.

] When connected to equipment without a built-in

MPEG decoder.

Changing the unit’s settings

Audio Mode for XP Recording

Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.

[Dolby Digital
≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that

of normal XP mode recordings.

≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected

LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.

≥When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in

advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ left).

] (➡ 78) [LPCM] (➡ 78)

Audio Mode for DV Input

You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
input terminal (➡ 23).

[Stereo 1

[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)

[Mix] Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
≥When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in

] Records audio (L1, R1).

subsequent to original recording.

advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➡ left).

Display

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

On-Screen Messages

Choose whether to show status messages automatically.

[Automatic

] [Off]

Grey Background

Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey
background when tuner reception is weak.

] [Off]

[On

FL Display

Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(➡ 61) to “On”.

] [Dim]

[Bright

[Automatic]

The display turns dark during play and disappears when
the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily if a button
is pressed. While using this mode, the standby power
consumption can be reduced.

Pause Live TV Icon

Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the on-screen
icon while using the Pause Live TV function.

] [Off]

[On

RQT9075

59

Changing the unit’s settings

Connection

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may
not be able to change the settings.

TV Aspect

Set to match the type of television connected.
[16:9

] When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.

[Pan & Scan] When connected to a 4:3 aspect

[Letterbox] When connected to a 4:3 aspect

Progressive

You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma
television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan.
This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set “AV1 Output” to “RGB 1
(without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.

[On] [Off

[Note]

≥When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube)

or a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is
progressive compatible, progressive output can cause some
flickering. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned about it
(➡ 53).

≥Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an

incompatible television.

TV System

Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting
with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles
on the HDD.

] ≥Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system

[PAL

[NTSC] ≥Select when connecting to a NTSC television.

[Note]

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)

≥During redording, timer recording standby, this unit cannot play

discs or titles that do not match the “TV System” setting. It is
recommended “TV System” be set to match the discs or title
before playing them.

television, side picture is trimmed
for 16:9 picture.

television. 16:9 picture is shown in
the letterbox style.

]

television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as
PAL 60.

≥Select to record television programmes and PAL input

from other equipment.

≥[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on

the HDD.

Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.

≥Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
≥[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded

on the HDD.

Aspect for 4:3 Video

To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how
to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.

[4:3

] Picture output expands left or right.

[16:9] Picture is output as original aspect with

side panels.

Digital Audio Output

[HDMI and Optical]

[Optical Only] Select when this unit is connected to an

amplifier with an optical digital audio
cable and connected to a TV with an
HDMI cable and you want to enjoy the
highest quality of audio from discs
(➡ 64).

VIERA Link

Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.

]

[On

[Off] Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.

AV1 Output

Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)” for
component output (progressive output).
If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.

[Video (with component)

Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite
signal.

[S Video (with component)]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video
signal.

[RGB 1 (without component)]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.

[RGB 2 (without component)]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.

]

AV2 Input

Set according to the output signal of the connected equipment.

] [S Video]

[Video

RQT9075

60

To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)

While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

HDMI Settings

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

HDMI Video Format

You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may
be improved by changing the setting.
≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need

to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this
unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must
also be 1080p compatible.

[576i/480i] [576p/480p] [720p] [1080i]

[1080p] When setting video output to “1080p”, we

[Automatic

recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that
have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

] Automatically selects the output resolution best

suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).

Setup

Tun in g

Remote Control

Press “n” and “OK” together
for more than 5 seconds on the remote
control.

Disc
Picture

Others

(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)

Remote Control

Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic
products close together.

] [DVD 2] [DVD 3]

[DVD 1

Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.

1 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or

“DVD 3”) and press [OK].

To change the code on the remote control
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button

([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.

3 Press [OK].

∫ When the following indicator appears on the

unit’s display

The unit’s remote control code

Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s
(➡ step 2).

[Note]

Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the
main unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(➡ step 2).

Clock

≥In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in

memory for approximately 60 minutes.

Clock

Time Date

15 : 45 : 39

Number

0 9

Please set clock manually.

CHANGE

SELECT

OK: store RETURN: leave

OK

RETURN

1 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.

The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Ye a r
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J

2 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.

You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.

3 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.

The clock starts.

Power Save

[On] Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to

standby (➡ 77).

]

[Off

(If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically
turned to “Off”.)
≥Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.

– “FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (➡ 59).
– The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically

turned to “Off”.)

1

. 8

.

2008

Quick Start

The Quick Start feature enables this unit to be ready to start
recording as quick as approx. 1 second
can start recording soon after deciding you want to record
something.

§

Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.

]

[On

[Off] Standby power consumption is less than when this is set to

“On”.

(If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to “Off”.)
≥Startup takes up to a minute when:

– You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-RAM.
– You want to make other operations.
– The clock has not been set.

[For]Australia]a nd]N.Z.]

§

after turning it on. You

Country

[Australia] [New Zealand] [Others]

DivX Registration

You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video­on-Demand (VOD) content (➡ 29).

Initialize

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Shipping Condition

All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.

[Yes] [No

]

Default Settings

All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,
country settings
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.

§

Only for Australia and N.Z.

[Yes] [No

List of TV Reception Channels

[For]Asia]

Tuner

System

PAL–DK,

SECAM–DKK1

PAL–BGH,

SECAM–BG

PAL–I Hong

PAL–D China 1–12 13

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

Tune r

System

PAL–B Australia 0–12 28–69 45 MHz to

PAL–BG New

[For]Middle]East]

Tuner

System

PAL–DK,
SECAM–

DKK1

PAL–BGH,

SECAM–BG

PAL–I South

§

, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings

]

Channel

VHF UHF CATV

Coverage

–

OIRT R1–R12 21

69 44 MHz to

CCIR E2–E12 E21–E69 S01–S05

–

—21

69 —

Kong

–

57 Z1–Z35

Channel

VHF UHF CATV

Coverage

1–11 21–69 44 MHz to

Zealand

Channel

VHF UHF CATV

Coverage

–

OIRT R1–R12 21

69 44 MHz to

CCIR E2–E12 E21–E69 S01–S05

–

13 21–69 —

4

Africa

470 MHz

M1–M10

U1–U10

S21–S41

470 MHz

470 MHz

470 MHz

M1–M10

U1–U10

S21–S41

Changing the unit’s settings

RQT9075

61

Other Settings

Television operation

You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.

DVD

TV

¦

Turn TV on/off

Input select

DRIVE
SELECT

1

¦

VOL

CH

AV

3

2
54

CH

6

Vol um e

Channel
Select

1 Point the remote control at the

television
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 01: [0] ➡ [1] 10: [1] ➡ [0]

Manufacturer and Code No.

Brand Code Brand Code

Panasonic 01/02/03/04 METZ 05/28
AIWA 35 MITSUBISHI 05/19/20/47
AKAI 27/30 MIVAR 24
BEJING 33 NEC 36
BEKO 05/71/72/73/74NOBLEX 33

2 Test by turning on the television and

changing channels.

≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows

correct operation.

≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for

your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.

[Note]

≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the

one that allows correct operation.

Child Lock

The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.

Press and hold [OK] and
[RETURN]
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the
unit’s display.

If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.

To cancel the Child Lock

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD”
disappears.

RQT9075

62

BENQ 58/59 NOKIA 25/26/27/

BP 09 NORDMENDE 10
BRANDT 10/15 OLEVIA 45
BUSH 05 ONWA 30/39/70
CENTREX 66 ORION 05
CHANGHONG 69 PEONY 49/69
CURTIS 05 PHILCO 41/48/64
DAEWOO 64/65 PHILIPS 05/06/46
DESMET 05 PHONOLA 05
DUAL 05 PIONEER 37/38
ELEMIS 05 PROVIEW 52
FERGUSON 10/34 PYE 05
FINLUX 61 RADIOLA 05
FISHER 21 SABA 10
FUJITSU 53 SALORA 26
FUNAI 63/67 SAMSUNG 32/42/43/

GOLDSTAR 05/50/51 SANSUI 05
GOODMANS 05 SANYO 21/54/55/56
GRADIENTE 36 SCHNEIDER 05/29/30
GRUNDIG 09 SEG 05/69/75/

HIKONA 52 SELECO 05/25
HITACHI 05/22/23/40/41SHARP 18

INNO HIT 05 SIEMENS 09
IRRADIO 30 SINUDYNE 05
ITT 25 SONY 08
JINGXING 49 TCL 31/33/66/

JVC 17/30/39/70 TELEFUNKEN 10/11/12/

KDS 52 TEVION 52
KOLIN 45 TEX ONDA 52
KONKA 62 THOMSON 10/15/44
LG 05/50/51 TOSHIBA 16/57
LOEWE 07/46 WHITE

WESTINGHOUSE

MAG 52 YA MA HA 18/41

60/61

65/68

76/77/78

67/69

13/14

05

Additional connections

A

OUTA

V4 IN

RF
IN

RF
OUT

DIGIT

AL A

UDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

OUTA

V4 IN

§

Leave “Yellow” unconnected.

Connecting a television with S VIDEO
terminals

The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)

Television’s rear panel

VIDEO

IN

a

a

S VIDEO

IN

S VIDEOVIDEO

S Video
cable

Audio/Video cable

(included)

This unit’s rear panel

AUDI O IN

R L

Red White

Red White

OUT

V4 I

R-AUDIO-L

Connecting a television with
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals

Television’s rear panel

Y

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

PB

PR

Component
video cable

RF
IN

RF

OPTICAL

OUT

DIGI

AL

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

UDIO OU

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

Y

PB

PR

AV2(EXT)

AV1
(TV)

COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (➡ 78) and provide a purer picture than the S
VIDEO OUT terminal.
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

[Required]setting]
“Progressive” setting in the Setup menu (➡ 60)

If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)

Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is
progressive compatible. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned
about it (➡ 53). This is the same for multi system televisions using
PAL mode.

AUDIO IN

R L

Red White

a

Audio/Video
cable

(included)

a

Red White

OUT

V4 I

R-AUDIO-L

S VIDEOVIDEO

This unit’s rear panel

Other Settings/Additional connections

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

This unit

DO NOT

Progressive output

CRT

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

RQT9075

63

Additional connections

DIGIT

AL A

UDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

OUTOUTAV4IV 4 IN

OUTA

V4 IN

RF
IN

RF
OUT

DIGIT

AL A

UDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

V OUTT

OUTA

V4 IN

Connecting an amplifier with a digital

Connecting a stereo amplifier

input terminal

≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an

amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.
[Required]setting]
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 59)

≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital

audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (➡ 60).

Amplifier’s rear panel

In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.

≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),

check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.

≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.

Amplifier’s rear panel

OPTICAL IN

AUDIO IN

R L

Red White

Audio cable

Optical digital audio cable

Do not bend sharply when
connecting.

This unit’s rear panel

OPTICAL

DIGI

AL

UDIO OU

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

Insert fully, with
this side facing
up.

Y

PB

PR

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

AV2(EXT)

Red White

AV1
(TV)

OUT

V4 I

R-AUDIO-L

This unit’s rear panel

S VIDEOVIDEO

Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,

native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be
possible. [➡ 34, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.

[Required]setting]

≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to

“HDMI and Optical” (➡ 60).
(The default setting is “HDMI and
Optical”.)

RF
IN

RF

OPTICAL

OUT

DIGI

AL

UDIO OU

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

TM

”)]

Television’s rear panel

HDMI IN

HDMI cable

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

Receiver’s rear
panel

HDMI cable

Y

PB

PR

AV2 (EXT)

AV1
(TV)

OUT

V4 I

R-AUDIO-L

S VIDEOVIDEO

HDMI AV OUT

AAV OU

RQT9075

64

This unit’s rear panel

[Note]

≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (➡ 78) and

output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)

≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)

Connecting a television and VCR

RF
IN

RF
OUT

DIGIT

AL A

UDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

OUTA

V4 IN

V OUTT

To h

t

Television’s rear panel

To the aerial

VHF/UHF

RF IN

AUDIO IN

R L

VIDEO IN

ousehold mains socke

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)

[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]

(AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz)

1

Aerial cable

2

RF coaxial cable

(included)

Red White Yellow

[For\Saudi\Arabia[

BE SURE TO
READ THE
CAUTION FOR
THE AC MAINS
LEAD ON PAGE

Other connections
(➡ 9, 63)

2 BEFORE
CONNECTION.

5

6

Additional connections

AC mains lead

(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.

[For]Middle]East]

Use the AC mains lead that matches
the socket for the area you live in.

Audio/Video cable

(included)

[For]Asia]

AC mains lead with a label is for
Thailand.
AC mains lead without a label is for
areas other than Thailand.

RF
IN

RF

OPTICAL

OUT

DIGI

AL

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

UDIO OU

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

Y

PB

PR

AV2 (EXT)

Red White Yellow

AV1
(TV)

Red White Yellow

OUT

V4 I

R-AUDIO-L

AAV OU

S VIDEOVIDEO

Cooling fan

This unit’s rear panel

AC IN

RF coaxial cable

Connect the unit directly to the television

4

3

Audio/Video cable

If you connect the unit through an AV
selector or video cassette recorder to the
television, video signal will be affected by
copyright protection systems and the picture

DO NOT

Television

may not be shown correctly.

VCR

Red White Yellow

This unit

RF OUT

VHF/UHF

RF IN

R L

AUDIO OUT

VIDEO OUT

VCR’s rear panel

Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal

You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB
output on this unit.

≥When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR

Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there
are both television and VCR input terminals.

[Required]setting]

“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (➡ 60)

Connecting to a VCR with 21-pin Scart terminal

You can also connect with the AV2 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.

[Required]setting]

“AV2 Input” in the Setup menu (➡ 60)

RQT9075

65

Frequently asked questions

Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.

Set up Page

What equipment is necessary to play
multi channel surround sound?

Are the headphones and speakers
directly connected to the unit?

The television has both S VIDEO IN and
COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals.
Which terminal should I connect with?

Is my television progressive output
compatible?

Disc

Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs
bought in another country?

Can a DVD-Video that does not have a
region number be played?

Please tell me about disc compatibility
with this unit.

Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW
compatibility with this unit.

Recording

Can I record from a commercially
purchased video cassette or DVD?

Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and
+RW recorded on this unit be played on
other equipment?

Can a digital audio signal from this unit
be recorded to other equipment?

Can I switch to bilingual broadcast
during recording?

Can I high speed copy to a disc? ≥Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before recording the

≥You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must

connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder.

≥You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc. 64

≥Connecting with the component video out terminal provides a more vivid picture

compared to connecting with the S Video out terminal.
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan,
connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is
compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some
flickering can occur.

≥All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p input terminals

are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.

≥You cannot play DVD-Video if their region numbers are not supported by this unit.

Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.

≥The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play

discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to
a standard.

≥This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and

plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a
DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).

≥This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.

≥This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following

standards: CD-DA, Video CD, DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG).

≥You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.

≥Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording

is usually not possible.

≥You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalising the disc on

this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.

≥If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
≥You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio

Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu.
– PCM Down Conversion: On
– Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording
equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.

≥You cannot record MP3 signals.
≥With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].

(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)

≥With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before

recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.

programme.)
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.

64

63

—

Cover

—

11–12

—

12, 14

—

—

—

—

59

—

26

59

43

RQT9075

66

USB

What can or cannot be done using the
USB port on this unit?

Music

What will happen if I try to record the
same CD multiple times?

Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD
to the disc or USB memory?

≥You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB memory.
≥You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD.
≥[EH68] You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
≥Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory.
≥Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory cannot be formatted on this

unit.

≥Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.

≥New album will be made following the existing album. —

≥No, you cannot. —

28
48
50
47
—
—

13

Messages

On the television

Authorisation Error. ≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different

Cannot finish recording completely. ≥The programme was copy-protected.

Cannot playback.
TV system is different from the
setting.
To playback, please change the TV
System in Setup.

Cannot record to the disc. ≥The disc may be dirty or scratched. 15

Unable to format.

Cannot play on this unit. ≥You tried to play a non-compatible image.

Cannot record. Disc is full. ≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.

Cannot record. Maximum number of
titles exceeded.

No Disc ≥The disc may be upside down. —

No folders. ≥There is no compatible folder in this unit. 14

No SD CARD
No valid SD card.

[EH68]

Not enough space in the copy
destination.

This is a non-recordable disc. ≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised

This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management in
FUNCTION MENU.

Not enough space on HDD. Space
of 4 hours (in SP mode) is
necessary.

Maximum number of titles is
recorded on HDD. Please delete
unwanted titles.

Rental Expired. ≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX) 29

$ ≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc. —

registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)

≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded.

≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV

system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.

≥Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.

[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]

≥Use a new disc.

≥The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already

inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.

≥The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.

≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.

≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination

Capacity” is not exceeded.

DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.

≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the

HDD and then copy to the disc.

≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD

or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 499.
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.

19, 37,

19, 37,

46, 49,

Page

28

—
—
21

60

14
15

55

—

15

13

41, 55

51

11

55
—

19

Frequently asked questions/Messages

Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.

Abkhazian: 6566
Afar: 6565
Afrikaans: 6570
Albanian: 8381
Amharic: 6577
Arabic: 6582
Armenian: 7289
Assamese: 6583
Aymara: 6589
Azerbaijani: 6590
Bashkir: 6665
Basque: 6985
Bengali; Bangla:

Bhutani: 6890
Bihari: 6672
Breton: 6682
Bulgarian: 6671
Burmese: 7789
Byelorussian: 6669
Cambodian: 7577

Catalan: 6765
Chinese: 9072
Corsican: 6779
Croatian: 7282
Czech: 6783
Danish: 6865
Dutch: 7876
English: 6978
Esperanto: 6979
Estonian: 6984
Faroese: 7079
Fiji: 7074
Finnish: 7073

6678

French: 7082
Frisian: 7089
Galician: 7176
Georgian: 7565
German: 6869
Greek: 6976
Greenlandic: 7576
Guarani: 7178

ujarati: 7185

G
Hausa: 7265
Hebrew:7387
Hindi: 7273
Hungarian: 7285
Icelandic: 7383
Indonesian: 7378
Interlingua: 7365
Irish: 7165
Italian: 7384
Japanese: 7465
Javanese: 7487
Kannada: 7578
Kashmiri: 7583
Kazakh: 7575
Kirghiz: 7589
Korean: 7579
Kurdish: 7585
Laotian: 7679
Latin: 7665
Latvian, Lettish: 7686

Lingala: 7678
Lithuanian: 7684
Macedonian: 7775
Malagasy: 7771
Malay: 7783
Malayalam: 7776
Maltese: 7784
Maori: 7773
Marathi: 7782
Moldavian: 7779
Mongolian: 7778

Nauru:7865
Nepali: 7869
Norwegian: 7879

Oriya: 7982
Pashto, P
Persian: 7065
Polish: 8076
Por tuguese: 8084
Punjabi: 8065
Quechua: 8185

ushto: 8083

Rhaeto-Romance:

8277
Romanian: 8279
Russian: 8285
Samoan: 8377
Sanskrit: 8365
Scots Gaelic: 7168
Serbian: 8382
Serbo-Croatian: 8372
Shona: 8378
Sindhi: 8368
Singhalese: 8373
Slovak: 8375
Slovenian: 8376
Somali: 8379
Spanish: 6983
Sundanese: 8385
Swahili: 8387
Swedish: 8386
Tagalog: 8476
Tajik: 8471

Tamil: 8465
Ta ta r : 8484
Te lugu: 8469
Thai: 8472
Tibetan: 6679
Tigrinya: 8473
Tonga: 8479
Turkish: 8482
Turkmen: 8475
Twi: 8487
Ukrainian: 8575
Urdu: 8582
Uzbek: 8590

Vietnamese: 8673
Volapük: 8679
Welsh: 6789
Wolof: 8779

Xhosa: 8872
Yiddish: 7473
Yo r uba: 8979
Zulu:9085

RQT9075

67

Messages

On the unit’s display

The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.

Page

DVD 

(“∑” stands for a number.)

≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.

Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.

HARD ERR

§

≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased. —

NoERAS ≥You cannot delete items on this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

NoREAD ≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.

≥This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.

Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.

NoWRIT ≥You cannot write to this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

PLEASE WAIT

§

≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying

out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait
until the message disappears.

PROG FULL

§

≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. 25

REMOVE ≥The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device and turn the unit off. —

SP 35:50
LP 151h

“SP”,”LP” and the numbers
are examples.

≥Available space on the HDD or disc.

The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example
“LP 151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means
“151 hours”.

UNFORMAT

§

≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-

Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.

UNSUPPORT

§

≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.

11–12

≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.

F74 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.

Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

F75 ≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.

Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

U59 ≥The unit is hot.

The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message
disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear
of the unit.

U61 ≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or

copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.

U76 ≥HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright

protection.

U80
U81

≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now

press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.

U99

U88 ≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while

recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.

H or F ≥ There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s

condition.)

≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the

69–74

following.

1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.

2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.

X HOLD ≥The Child Lock function is activated.

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears.

§

The message are alternately displayed.

61

—

15

5

—

—

—

55

13

—

—

—

—

—

—

69

—

62

RQT9075

68

Troubleshooting guide

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.

The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:

≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic terrestrial broadcasting

breaks.

≥Operations are slow to respond in power save mode.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a

Panasonic disc.)

Power Page

No power.

The unit does not turn on
pressing [Í DVD].

The unit switches to standby
mode.

The power is turned off
automatically.

Displays

The display is dim. ≥Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu. 59

“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
display.

The time recorded on the disc
and the available time shown do
not add up.
The displayed time of this unit is
different from the actual
recording time or MP3 recording
time.

Compared to the actual recorded
time, the elapsed time displayed
is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)

“U88” is displayed and the disc
cannot be ejected.

≥Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket. 8, 65

≥One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on. —

≥If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV with an HDMI cable, this unit will

be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode.

≥Set the clock. 61

≥Times shown may disagree with actual times.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the

last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.

≥Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no

increase in disc space.

≥More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,

DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.

≥While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
≥The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames

(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.

≥The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.
1Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about
10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.

2 While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for

about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.

≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being

activated. (Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10
seconds.)

≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected

sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

34

—
—

—

—

—

—

—

Messages/Troubleshooting guide

TV screen and video

Television reception worsens
after connecting the unit.

Status messages do not appear. ≥Select “Automatic” in “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu. 59

The grey background does not
appear.

Picture does not appear during
timer recording.

The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
expands left and right.

Screen size is wrong.

The screen changes
automatically.

≥This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment.

It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not
solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.

≥Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu. 59

≥Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer recording

is going to work properly, turn the unit on.

≥Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set

“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.

≥Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.
≥If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to “16:9” in the Setup menu.
≥By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be

made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.

≥Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “4:3”.

It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.

≥The display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if there is no operation for

5 minutes or more. Press [OK] to return to the previous screen.

—

—

53

60
60
58

58

—

RQT9075

69

Troubleshooting guide

TV screen and video (continued) Page

The recorded title is stretched
vertically.

There is a lot of after-image when
playing video.

When playing DVD-Video using
progressive output, one part of
the picture momentarily appears
to be doubled up.

There is no apparent change in
picture quality when adjusted
with the Picture menu in the on­screen menus.

The images from this unit do not
appear on the television.

Picture is distorted.

The picture is distorted during
play, or video will not play
correctly.

Sound

No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio
type.

Cannot switch audio. ≥You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.

≥16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.

– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”

recording mode.
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
– If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the Setup menu.

When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same aspect, set “Rec for High Speed

Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”.
– By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be

made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating
instructions.

≥Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. 53

≥Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or

material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.

≥The effect is less perceivable with some types of video. —

≥Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal,

S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI AV OUT terminal on
this unit.

≥Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
≥Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.

Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds
to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.

≥The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While

stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.

≥When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit’s TV

system.

≥Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.

Reduce the number of connected devices.

≥You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or unfavorable weather

conditions.

≥The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between recorded titles in

the following situations:
– between titles recorded with different recording modes.
– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
– between playlist chapters.

≥Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the

amplifier if you have connected one.

≥Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.
≥Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.

– When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.
– When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.

≥Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
≥Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.

Reduce the number of connected devices.

≥The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT

terminal or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.

≥To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to

“HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.

≥Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected

with an HDMI cable.

≥If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you

can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”.

– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the

disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.
– When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default setting is “On”).

≥The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch

the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using
audio cables.

≥There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.

—

—
58

58

53

8, 9, 63,

64, 65

—
—

60

—

—

—

—

8, 9, 59,

63, 64, 65

26
53

—
—

—

60

—

58

—

59
58

59, 64

—

RQT9075

70

Operation Page

Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.

≥Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the

code.

≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote

control.

Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time
for more than 5 seconds.

62

61

≥The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
≥You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during

operation.

≥Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
≥Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight

exposure.

≥It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.
≥It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
≥The child lock function is activated.

The unit is on but cannot be
operated.

Cannot eject disc. ≥The unit is recording.

Cannot tune channels.

Cannot download channel
presets from the television.

Startup is slow. ≥Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.

≥Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
≥Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
≥The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.
≥One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.

Reset the unit as follows:
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about
10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.

2 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the

dealer.

≥The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the

main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock
function.

≥Check the connections.
≥You must connect to a VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3) compatible TV with a HDMI cable to

download channel presets.

≥Startup takes time in the following situations:

– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
– The clock is not set.
– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
– For a few minutes after 5:15 am due to system maintenance of this unit.
– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

4
4

—
—

61
62
62

16, 17

—
—
—

—

62

8, 65

—

61

—

Troubleshooting guide

RQT9075

71

Troubleshooting guide

Recording, timer recording and copying Page

Cannot record.
Cannot copy.

Cannot record from external
equipment.

≥You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the

unit can record onto.

≥The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD

Management.

≥Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).
≥You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached

its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.

≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the

HDD and then copy.
– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a

blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode

recording is necessary).
– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 499.

≥You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you can record and copy again if

you format DVD-RW.

≥Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and

+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.

≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit

may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings.

(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded
with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.

≥Check that the connection is correct.
≥Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.

11

55
54

78

19, 37,

55
—

19, 37,

55

—

—

—

—

23, 65

—

Timer recording does not work
properly.

§

CODE

G­work properly.

§

programming does not

Only for Australia and N.Z.

Timer recording does not stop
even when [∫] is pressed.

The timer programme remains
even after recording finishes.

A part or whole of a recorded
title has been lost.

Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.
disc using the high speed mode.

When copying, it takes a long
time even when high speed
mode is selected.

An unusually loud sound is
coming from the rotating DVD-R,
etc.

The DV automatic recording
function does not work.

≥The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the

25

programme.

≥The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording

24

list is not on.)

≥Set the clock.

≥Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

61

24

recording drive.

≥If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,

—

you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.

≥The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly. 24

≥If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while

—

recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer

55

any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.

≥When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu. (The

58

default setting is “On”).

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot

—

perform high-speed copy.

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD recorders with “Rec for High

—

Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.

≥Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed

—

recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the
disc.

≥It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
≥You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic

—
—

DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.

≥When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video

—

format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,
however, this is not a problem.

≥If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is abor ted, check the connections and DV

23

equipment settings.

≥You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.
≥Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV

—
—

equipment are not successive.

≥Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.
≥The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.

—
23

RQT9075

72

Play Page

Play fails to start even when
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.

Audio and video momentarily
pause.

DVD-Video is not played. ≥You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.

Alternative soundtrack and
subtitles cannot be selected.

No subtitles. ≥Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.

Angle cannot be changed. ≥Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded. —
You have forgotten your ratings

password.
You want to cancel the ratings
level.

Quick View does not work. ≥This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.

The resume play function does
not work.

The Video CD picture does not
display properly.

Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does
not work.

It takes time before play starts. ≥This is normal on DivX video. (DivX) —
Picture stops. ≥Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX) —
Cannot see the beginning of the

title played.

Edit

Available disc space does not
increase even after deleting a
title.

Cannot edit. ≥You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.

Cannot format. ≥The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

Cannot create chapters.

Cannot mark the start point or
the end point during “Partial
Delete” operation.

Cannot delete chapters. ≥When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer. 37
Cannot create a playlist. ≥You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select

Music

Tracks could not be copied to
the HDD.

ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not
completely displayed.

≥Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
≥The disc is dirty.
≥You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
≥You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the equipment used for recording.
≥You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM

using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.

≥When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD

players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.

≥You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
≥If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)
≥Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages are displayed, follow the

on-screen instructions.

≥This occurs between playlist chapters.
≥This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.

≥This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches

between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.

≥Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is not defective.
≥The languages are not recorded on the disc.

≥You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on

some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.

≥Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.

≥The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE

SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main
unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).

≥This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
≥Memorized positions are cancelled when

– press [∫] several times.
– open the disc tray.
– [SD] ([EH68]) [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the power.
– if a recording or timer recording was executed.

≥When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.
≥When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during

search.

≥These functions do not work with finalised discs.
≥Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title

recorded on the disc.

≥(If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)

When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able to see the
beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the
beginning of the title.

≥Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.
≥Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.

Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.

≥You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.
≥The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the

disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.

≥These operations are not possible with still pictures.
≥You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before

a start point.

them individually.

≥If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS restrictions, they will not be copied.
≥Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.)

cannot be guaranteed.

≥Bonus tracks may not be copied.
≥Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this unit. —

11–12

Cover

11–12

15
15

—
—

58

—

29

—

—
—

—

11

58

—

16

—

52

—

—
—

—

60

—

—

60

—

19

—

19

15

—

—
—

—

—
—

—

Troubleshooting guide

RQT9075

73

Troubleshooting guide

Still pictures Page

Cannot display Direct Navigator
screen.

Cannot edit or format a card.
([EH68])

The contents of the card cannot
be read.
([EH68])

Copying, deleting and setting
protection takes a long time.
([EH68])

USB

The contents of the USB memory
cannot be read.

≥This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy. —

≥Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message

54

sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)

≥Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this does not solve the problem, turn

—

off and turn on the unit again.

≥The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.)

13, 14

This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and
FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format.

≥The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this

13

unit.

≥You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB and SDHC Memory Cards

—

with capacities from 4 GB to 16 GB.

≥This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures or MPEG4 on an SD card.
≥When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.

≥When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or

—

—
55

card.

≥Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert again. If this does not solve the

—

problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.

≥Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly.
≥The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not compatible with the unit. (The

15

13, 14

contents on the USB memory may be damaged.)

≥The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible

14

with this unit.

≥Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
≥USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a USB hub may not be

—
—

recognized by this unit.

≥Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.
≥If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB memory may not be

13
—

recognized by this unit.

VIERA Link

VIERA Link doesn’t work. ≥Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front display when

the power for the main unit is set to On.

≥Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.
≥Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
≥Some functions may not work if depending on the version of “HDAVI Control” of the connected

equipment. This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” functions.

≥If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was changed, or if there was a

power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control” may
not work.
In this case, perform the following operations.
1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on, turn the TV (VIERA)

on again.

2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control” function to off, and then set to on

again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)

3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this unit’s screen is

displayed check that “HDAVI Control” is working.

The operation on this unit (music
playback etc.) is interrupted.

≥The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote

control that do not work for VIERA Link functions.

To reset this unit

To return all the settings other
than the main ones to the factory
preset

≥Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings

level, ratings password and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.

≥Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the tuning

settings, clock settings, country settings
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.

≥Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the country setting screen

§

, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings

§

or the
Auto-Setup screen appears. All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.

§

Only for Australia and N.Z.

To reset the ratings level
settings

To restore the unit if it freezes

≥While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and

hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.

≥Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.) —

due to one of the safety devices
being activated

—

60
—
—

—

—

61

61

—

—

RQT9075

74

Safety precautions

Placement

Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.

Do not place heavy items on the unit.

Volt age

Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.

Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.

AC mains lead protection

Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.

Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.

Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric shock.

Gracenote® Corporate Description
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by
Gracenote
recognition technology and related content delivery.
For more information visit www.gracenote.com

Gracenote
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more
of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some
services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

Gracenote

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE
TERMS BELOW.

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the
“Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or file
identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist,
track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or
embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended
End-User functions of this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non­commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

®

. Gracenote is the industry standard in music

.

®

Proprietary Legends

R

End-User License Agreement

Foreign matter

Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric

shock or malfunction.

Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.

Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.

Service

Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.

Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate
if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree
to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote
Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow
the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy
Policy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or
implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from
the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may
provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any
time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

Troubleshooting guide/Safety precautions

RQT9075

75

Specifications

Recording system DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format

DVD-R : DVD-Video format

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format

DVD-RW : DVD-Video format

+R

+R DL (Double Layer)

+RW

Recordable discs

DVD-RAM: 2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)

DVD-R: 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),

1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
DVD-R DL: 2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
DVD-RW: 1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

+R: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),

2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
+R DL: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
+RW: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

Recording time Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)

XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours

LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours

[EH58]

Maximum Approx. 441 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)

XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 110 hours

LP: Approx. 221 hours, EP: Approx. 331 hours/441 hours

[EH68]

Maximum Approx. 567 hours with 320 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)

XP: Approx. 71 hours, SP: Approx. 142 hours

LP: Approx. 284 hours, EP: Approx. 426 hours/567 hours

Playable discs

DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format

DVD-R : DVD-Video format, DivX

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format, DivX

DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format

+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW

DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD

§1

CD-R/CD-RW : CD-DA

, Video CD§1, MP3§1, JPEG§1, DivX

Internal HDD capacity [EH58] 250 GB

[EH68] 320 GB

Audio

Recording system: Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)
Audio in: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)
Input level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Input impedance: More than 10 k≠
Audio out: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Output level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Output impedance: Less than 1 k≠
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)

HDMI Output 19 pin type A: 1 pc
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.

Video

Video system:

[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]

SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields

NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields

NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields

Recording system: MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East] Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] Video in (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

[For]Asia]and]Middle]East] S-Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):

AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):

AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

Video out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):

AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

§1

§1

RGB out (PAL/NTSC): AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination

Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)

Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

B: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

P

R: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

§1

P

Optical pick-up System with 1 lens, 2 integration units

(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)

LASER specification

Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)

Wave length:

CD 780 nm wave length
DVD 662 nm wave length

Laser power:

No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection

RQT9075

76

Television system

[For]Asia]

Tuner system Channel coverage

PA L- D K,
SECAM-DKK1
OIRT

PA L- B GH ,
SECAM-BG
CCIR

VHF:
UHF:
CATV:

VHF:
UHF:
CATV:

R1 to R12
21 to 69
44 MHz to 470 MHz

E2 to E12
E21 to E69
S01 to S05,
M1 to M10, U1 to U10, S21 to S41

PA L- I

UHF: 21 to 69

Hong Kong
PA L- D

China

VHF:
UHF:
CATV:

1 to 12
13 to 57
Z1 to Z35

RF converter output: Not provided

[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]

Tuner system Channel coverage

PA L- B
Australia

PA L- B G
New Zealand

VHF:
UHF:
CATV:

VHF:
UHF:
CATV:

0 to 12
28 to 69
45 MHz to 470 MHz

1 to 11
21 to 69
44 MHz to 470 MHz

RF converter output: Not provided

[For]Middle]East]

Tuner system Channel coverage

PA L- D K,
SECAM-DKK1
OIRT

PA L- B GH ,
SECAM-BG
CCIR

VHF:
UHF:
CATV:

VHF:
UHF:
CATV:

R1 to R12
21 to 69
44 MHz to 470 MHz

E2 to E12
E21 to E69
S01 to S05, M1 to M10,
U1 to U10, S21 to S41

PA L- I
South Africa

VHF:
UHF:

4–13
21–69

RF converter output: Not provided

SD Card ([EH68])

Slot: SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc

Compatible media: SD Memory Card

§2

, SDHC Memory Card,

MultiMediaCard

Format: FAT12, FAT16

(In case of SD Memory Card/MultiMediaCard)

§3

(In case of SDHC Memory Card)

FAT3 2

Still picture (JPEG)

Image file format:

JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)

Number of pixels: Between 34 a 34 and 6144 a 4096

sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0

Thawing time: Approx. 1.9 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)

Video (SD Video)

§4

Codec: MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
File Format: SD-Video format conforming

DV input IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc
USB port Type A : 1 pc

USB standard: [EH68] USB 2.0 High Speed

[EH58] USB 2.0 Full Speed

Format: FAT16, FAT32

Video (SD Video)

§4

([EH68])

Codec: MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
File Format: SD-Video format conforming

Others

Region code:

[For]Asia] #3
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] #4
[For]Middle]East] #2

Operating temperature: 5 oC to 40 oC
Operating humidity range: 10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
Power supply:

[For]Asia]and]Middle]East] AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz

Power consumption: Approx. 36 W
Dimensions (WkHkD): 430 mmk59 mmk326 mm
Mass: Approx. 4.2 kg

Power consumption in standby mode:

Specifications

Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)

Approx. 8 W (Quick Start mode)

[Note]

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

§1

Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.

§2

Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)

§3

Long file name is unsupported.

§4

Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card or
Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, to HDD or
DVD-RAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and transfer to
HDD or DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible.

≥Useable capacity will be less. (SD card)

§3

RQT9075

77

Glossary

RQT9075

78

Bitstream

This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.

CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)

CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.

Decoder

A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.

DivX

DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality
that maintains a relatively small file size.

Dolby Digital

This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can
be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.

Down-mixing

This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then
only output the front two channels.

Drive

In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD) and SD card (SD)([EH68]). These perform the reading and
writing of data.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.

Dynamic range

Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.

Film and video

DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.

Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24

frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.

Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL

discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).
Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or
animation.

Finalise

A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this
unit.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for
recording again.

Folder

This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD card ([EH68]) where
groups of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to
the place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 ([EH68]) are stored.

Formatting

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD cards ([EH68]) and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on
this unit.
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.

Frames and fields

Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.

u

Frame

≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but

picture quality is generally better.

≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but

there is no blurring.

HDD (Hard disk drive)

This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high­definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.

LPCM (Linear PCM)

These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs.

MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)

A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be
copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)

An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality.

Pan&Scan/Letterbox

In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.

Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture

Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and

Playback control (PBC)

If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)

Progressive/Interlace

The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p
input terminals are progressive compatible.

Protection

You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.

RGB

This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.

Field Field

fills the screen.

bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.

r

Sampling frequency

Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.

Thumbnail

This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.

1080i

In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic
and rich image.

1080p

In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50

th

of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

720p

In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50

th

of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

Glossary

RQT9075

79

Index

Adjust the audio quality

(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Adjust the picture quality

(Picture menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Album (CD)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Album (Still picture)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Audio

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . 25

AV2 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Channel

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 36

Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Cleaning

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Connection

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 65

Amplifier, system component,

receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

DV input terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 64

Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 9, 63, 65

Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Copy

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Create Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 37

Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Delete

Album (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39

Group (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Track (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 59, 60

Direct Navigator. . . . . . . . . 27, 30, 36, 40

Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–12

Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

DivX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 28–29, 78

DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Edit

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Enabling discs to be played on other

equipment–Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 78

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 78

FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . . . . . 21

FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . 33

CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

G­Gracenote
Group (MP3)

Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

HDAVI Control. . . . . . . . . 9, 34–35, 60, 64

HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 60, 64, 78

High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 78

Language

Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 58

Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 58

LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 78

Manual Skip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Menu

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–29

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Mode

Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 29

Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 32

Music on HDD

Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Name

Album (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Entering text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Group (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 37

®

Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 60, 78

Properties

Music on HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 40

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Protection

Album (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 58

Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

DV automatic recording. . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Important notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Relief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 24–25

Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Remote control code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 53

Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Simultaneous rec and play. . . . . . . . . 22

Soundtrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Still picture

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Subtitle

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc

(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Time Slip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 24–25

Tuning

Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

TV System (PAL/NTSC). . . . . . . . . . . . 60

USB

Copy (Music). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Copy (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Supported formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Web Site: http://panasonic.net

VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 34–35, 60, 64

p

RQT9075-L

F0308YU0